Endres+Hauser BA Proline Promag H 500 Operating Instruction
PDF
Download
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
BA01401D/06/EN/06.24-00 71661666 2024-07-17 Products Solutions Valid as of version 01.06.zz (Device firmware) Operating Instructions Proline Promag H 500 Electromagnetic flowmeter Modbus RS485 Services Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 • Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available when working on or with the device. • To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific to working procedures. • The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your Endress+Hauser sales organization will supply you with current information and updates to this manual. 2 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Table of contents Table of contents 1 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.1 1.2 6.1 1.3 1.4 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.2.1 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.2.2 Electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.2.3 Communication-specific symbols . . . . . 6 1.2.4 Tool symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.2.5 Symbols for certain types of information . . . . . . . . . 7 1.2.6 Symbols in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Device-specific IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.7.2 Protecting access via a password . . . . 11 2.7.3 Access via web server . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.7.4 Access via service interface (CDIRJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 6.3 Mounting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 6.1.1 Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 6.1.2 Environmental and process requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 6.1.3 Special mounting instructions . . . . . . 28 Mounting the measuring instrument . . . . . . . 28 6.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 29 6.2.3 Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 6.2.4 Mounting the transmitter housing: Proline 500 – digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 6.2.5 Mounting the transmitter housing: Proline 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 6.2.6 Turning the transmitter housing: Proline 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 6.2.7 Turning the display module: Proline 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Post-mounting check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 7 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 7.1 7.2 3 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.1 Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.1.1 Proline 500 – digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.1.2 Proline 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Connecting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 7.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 7.2.2 Requirements for connection cable . . . 36 7.2.3 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 7.2.4 Shielding and grounding . . . . . . . . . . 40 7.2.5 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 41 7.2.6 Preparing the connecting cable: Proline 500 – digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 7.2.7 Preparing the connecting cable: Proline 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Connecting the measuring instrument: Proline 500 - digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 7.3.1 Connecting the connecting cable . . . . 44 7.3.2 Connecting the signal cable and the supply voltage cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Connecting the measuring instrument: Proline 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 7.4.1 Connecting the connecting cable . . . . 51 7.4.2 Connecting the signal cable and the supply voltage cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Ensuring potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . 56 7.5.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 7.5.2 Connection example, standard scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 7.5.3 Connection example in special situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 7.6.1 Connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 7.7.1 Setting the device address . . . . . . . . . 61 7.7.2 Activating the terminating resistor . . 63 Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 64 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 4 Incoming acceptance and product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 4.1 4.2 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . 16 4.2.2 Sensor nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 4.2.3 Symbols on the device . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 5 Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 5.1 5.2 Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Transporting the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs . . 21 5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift . . . . . . . . 21 Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 5.3 6.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 Endress+Hauser 3 Table of contents 8 Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 8.1 8.2 Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Structure and function of the operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu . . . . 67 8.2.2 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Access to operating menu via local display . . . 69 8.3.1 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 8.3.2 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 8.3.3 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 8.3.4 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 8.3.5 Opening the context menu . . . . . . . . . 75 8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list . . . 77 8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly . . . . . . 77 8.3.8 Calling up help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 8.3.9 Changing the parameters . . . . . . . . . 78 8.3.10 User roles and related access authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 8.3.11 Disabling write protection via access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Access to operating menu via web browser . . . 80 8.4.1 Function range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 8.4.2 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 8.4.3 Connecting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 8.4.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 8.4.5 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 8.4.6 Disabling the Web server . . . . . . . . . . 86 8.4.7 Logging out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Access to the operating menu via the operating tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool . . . . . . 87 8.5.2 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 8.5.3 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 8.3 8.4 8.5 9 System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 9.1 Overview of device description files . . . . . . . . . 92 9.1.1 Current version data for the device . . . 92 9.1.2 Operating tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Compatibility with previous model . . . . . . . . . 92 Modbus RS485 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 9.3.1 Function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 9.3.2 Register information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 9.3.3 Response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 9.3.4 Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 9.3.5 Byte transmission sequence . . . . . . . . 95 9.3.6 Modbus data map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 9.2 9.3 10 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 10.1 Post-mounting and post-connection check . . . 98 10.2 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . 98 10.3 Connecting via FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 10.4 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 10.5 Configuring the measuring instrument . . . . . . 99 10.5.1 Defining the tag name . . . . . . . . . . . 100 10.5.2 Setting the system units . . . . . . . . . 100 4 Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 10.5.3 Configuring the communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 10.5.4 Displaying the I/O configuration . . . 103 10.5.5 Configuring the current input . . . . . 104 10.5.6 Configuring the status input . . . . . . 105 10.5.7 Configuring the current output . . . . 106 10.5.8 Configuring the pulse/frequency/ switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 10.5.9 Configuring the local display . . . . . . 115 10.5.10 Configuring the low flow cut off . . . . 117 10.5.11 Configuring empty pipe detection . . 119 10.5.12 Configuring the relay output . . . . . . 119 10.5.13 Configuring the double pulse output 121 10.5.14 Configuring flow damping . . . . . . . . 122 10.6 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 10.6.1 Using the parameter to enter the access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 10.6.2 Carrying out a sensor adjustment . . . 126 10.6.3 Configuring the totalizer . . . . . . . . . 126 10.6.4 Carrying out additional display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 10.6.5 Performing electrode cleaning . . . . . 131 10.6.6 WLAN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 10.6.7 Configuration management . . . . . . . 134 10.6.8 Using parameters for device administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 10.7 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 10.8 Protecting settings from unauthorized access 139 10.8.1 Write protection via access code . . . 139 10.8.2 Write protection via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 11 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 11.1 11.2 Reading off the device locking status . . . . . . 143 Reading off measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 11.2.1 "Process variables" submenu . . . . . . . 143 11.2.2 "Totalizer" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 11.2.3 "Input values" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 145 11.2.4 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 11.3 Adapting the measuring device to the process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 11.4 Performing a totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 11.4.1 Function scope of "Control Totalizer" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 11.4.2 Function range of "Reset all totalizers" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 12 Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 151 12.1 General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 12.2 Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 12.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 12.2.2 Sensor connection housing . . . . . . . 155 12.3 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 156 12.3.1 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures . . . . . 158 12.4 Diagnostic information in the web browser . . 158 12.4.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 12.4.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 159 12.5 Diagnostic information in FieldCare or DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 12.5.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 12.5.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 160 12.6 Diagnostic information via communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 12.6.1 Reading out diagnostic information 161 12.6.2 Configuring error response mode . . . 161 12.7 Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 161 12.7.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . 161 12.8 Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 162 12.9 Pending diagnostic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 12.10 Diagnostics list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 12.11 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 12.11.1 Reading out the event logbook . . . . . 167 12.11.2 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . 168 12.11.3 Overview of information events . . . . 168 12.12 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 169 12.12.1 Function range of "Device reset" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 12.13 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 12.14 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 12.15 Device history and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . 172 13 Table of contents 16.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 16.6 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 16.7 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 16.8 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 16.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 16.10 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 16.11 Display and user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 16.12 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 16.13 Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 16.14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 16.15 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 13.1 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 13.1.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 13.1.2 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 13.1.3 Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 13.2 Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 174 13.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 14 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 14.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept . . . . . 175 14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion . . . . 175 14.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 14.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 14.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 14.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 14.5.1 Removing the measuring device . . . . 176 14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device . . 176 15 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 15.1 Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 15.1.1 For the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 15.1.2 For the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 15.2 Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 15.3 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 16 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Endress+Hauser 5 About this document Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 1 About this document 1.1 Document function These Operating Instructions contain all the information required in the various life cycle phases of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and storage, to installation, connection, operation and commissioning, through to troubleshooting, maintenance and disposal. 1.2 Symbols 1.2.1 Safety symbols DANGER This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result in serious or fatal injury. WARNING This symbol alerts you to a potentially dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious or fatal injury. CAUTION This symbol alerts you to a potentially dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in minor or medium injury. NOTICE This symbol alerts you to a potentially harmful situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in damage to the product or something in its vicinity. 1.2.2 Electrical symbols Symbol Meaning Direct current Alternating current Direct current and alternating current Ground connection A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via a grounding system. Potential equalization connection (PE: protective earth) Ground terminals that must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections. The ground terminals are located on the interior and exterior of the device: • Interior ground terminal: potential equalization is connected to the supply network. • Exterior ground terminal: device is connected to the plant grounding system. 1.2.3 Communication-specific symbols Symbol Meaning Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Communication via a wireless, local network. 6 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 About this document 1.2.4 Tool symbols Symbol Meaning Torx screwdriver Phillips head screwdriver Open-ended wrench 1.2.5 Symbols for certain types of information Symbol Meaning Permitted Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted. Preferred Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred. Forbidden Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden. Tip Indicates additional information. Reference to documentation Reference to page A Reference to graphic Notice or individual step to be observed 1. , 2. , 3. … Series of steps Result of a step Help in the event of a problem Visual inspection 1.2.6 Symbols in graphics Symbol Meaning 1, 2, 3, ... Item numbers 1. , 2. , 3. , … Series of steps A, B, C, ... Views A-A, B-B, C-C, ... Sections - Hazardous area . Safe area (non-hazardous area) Flow direction Endress+Hauser 7 About this document Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 1.3 Documentation For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the following: • Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number from the nameplate • Endress+Hauser Operations app: Enter serial number from nameplate or scan matrix code on nameplate. The following documentation may be available depending on the device version ordered: Document type Purpose and content of the document Technical Information (TI) Planning aid for your device The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides an overview of the accessories and other products that can be ordered for the device. Brief Operating Instructions (KA) Guide that takes you quickly to the 1st measured value The Brief Operating Instructions contain all the essential information from incoming acceptance to initial commissioning. Operating Instructions (BA) Your reference document These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in the various life cycle phases of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and storage, to mounting, connection, operation and commissioning, through to troubleshooting, maintenance and disposal. Description of Device Parameters (GP) Reference for your parameters The document provides a detailed explanation of each individual parameter. The description is aimed at those who work with the device over the entire life cycle and perform specific configurations. Safety Instructions (XA) Depending on the approval, safety instructions for electrical equipment in hazardous areas are also supplied with the device. The Safety Instructions are a constituent part of the Operating Instructions. on the Safety Instructions (XA) that are relevant for Information the device is provided on the nameplate. Supplementary device-dependent documentation (SD/FY) 1.4 Always comply strictly with the instructions in the relevant supplementary documentation. The supplementary documentation is a constituent part of the device documentation. Registered trademarks Modbus® Registered trademark of SCHNEIDER AUTOMATION, INC. TRI-CLAMP® Registered trademark of Ladish & Co., Inc., Kenosha, USA 8 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Safety instructions 2 Safety instructions 2.1 Requirements for the personnel The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill the following requirements: ‣ Trained, qualified specialists must have a relevant qualification for this specific function and task. ‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator. ‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations. ‣ Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual and supplementary documentation as well as the certificates (depending on the application). ‣ Follow instructions and comply with basic conditions. The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements: ‣ Are instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the facility's owner-operator. ‣ Follow the instructions in this manual. 2.2 Intended use Application and media The measuring device described in this manual is intended only for the flow measurement of liquids with a minimum conductivity of 5 µS/cm. Depending on the version ordered, the measuring instrument can also be used to measure potentially explosive 1), flammable, toxid and oxidizing media. Measuring instruments for use in hazardous areas, in hygienic applications, or where there is an increased risk due to pressure, are specially labeled on the nameplate. To ensure that the measuring instrument is in perfect condition during operation: ‣ Only use the measuring instrument in full compliance with the data on the nameplate and the general conditions listed in the Operating Instructions and supplementary documentation. ‣ Using the nameplate, check whether the ordered device is permitted for the intended use in the hazardous area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure vessel safety). ‣ Use the measuring instrument only for media to which the process-wetted materials are sufficiently resistant. ‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range. ‣ Keep within the specified ambient temperature range. ‣ Protect the measuring instrument permanently against corrosion from environmental influences. Incorrect use Non-designated use can compromise safety. The manufacturer is not liable for damage caused by improper or non-designated use. LWARNING Danger of breakage due to corrosive or abrasive fluids and ambient conditions! ‣ Verify the compatibility of the process fluid with the sensor material. ‣ Ensure the resistance of all fluid-wetted materials in the process. ‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range. 1) Not applicable for IO-Link measuring instruments Endress+Hauser 9 Safety instructions Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 NOTICE Verification for borderline cases: ‣ For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistance in verifying the corrosion resistance of fluid-wetted materials, but does not accept any warranty or liability as minute changes in the temperature, concentration or level of contamination in the process can alter the corrosion resistance properties. Residual risks LCAUTION Risk of hot or cold burns! The use of media and electronics with high or low temperatures can produce hot or cold surfaces on the device. ‣ Mount suitable touch protection. 2.3 Workplace safety When working on and with the device: ‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment as per national regulations. 2.4 Operational safety Damage to the device! ‣ Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only. ‣ The operator is responsible for the interference-free operation of the device. Modifications to the device Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable dangers! ‣ If modifications are nevertheless required, consult with the manufacturer. Repair To ensure continued operational safety and reliability: ‣ Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted. ‣ Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to the repair of an electrical device. ‣ Use only original spare parts and accessories. 2.5 Product safety This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition in which it is safe to operate. It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. The manufacturer confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device.. 2.6 IT security Our warranty is valid only if the product is installed and used as described in the Operating Instructions. The product is equipped with security mechanisms to protect it against any inadvertent changes to the settings. IT security measures, which provide additional protection for the product and associated data transfer, must be implemented by the operators themselves in line with their security standards. 10 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 2.7 Safety instructions Device-specific IT security The device offers a range of specific functions to support protective measures on the operator's side. These functions can be configured by the user and guarantee greater inoperation safety if used correctly. The following list provides an overview of the most important functions: Function/interface Factory setting Recommendation Write protection via hardware write protection switch → 11 Not enabled On an individual basis following risk assessment Access code (also applies to web server login or FieldCare connection) → 11 Not enabled (0000) Assign a customized access code during commissioning WLAN (order option in display module) Enabled On an individual basis following risk assessment WLAN security mode Enabled (WPA2PSK) Do not change WLAN passphrase (Password) → 12 Serial number Assign an individual WLAN passphrase during commissioning WLAN mode Access point On an individual basis following risk assessment Web server → 12 Enabled On an individual basis following risk assessment Service interface CDI-RJ45 → 12 – On an individual basis following risk assessment 2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write protection Write access to the parameters of the device via the local display, web browser or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be disabled via a write protection switch (DIP switch on the main electronics module). When hardware write protection is enabled, only read access to the parameters is possible. Hardware write protection is disabled when the device is delivered → 141. 2.7.2 Protecting access via a password Different passwords are available to protect write access to the device parameters or access to the device via the WLAN interface. • User-specific access code Protect write access to the device parameters via the local display, web browser or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare). Access authorization is clearly regulated through the use of a user-specific access code. • WLAN passphrase The network key protects a connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the WLAN interface which can be ordered as an option. • Infrastructure mode When the device is operated in infrastructure mode, the WLAN passphrase corresponds to the WLAN passphrase configured on the operator side. User-specific access code Write access to the device parameters via the local display, web browser or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be protected by the modifiable, user-specific access code (→ 139). When the device is delivered, the device does not have an access code and is equivalent to 0000 (open). Endress+Hauser 11 Safety instructions Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 WLAN passphrase: Operation as WLAN access point A connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the WLAN interface (→ 88), which can be ordered as an optional extra, is protected by the network key. The WLAN authentication of the network key complies with the IEEE 802.11 standard. When the device is delivered, the network key is pre-defined depending on the device. It can be changed via the WLAN settings submenu in the WLAN passphrase parameter (→ 133). Infrastructure mode A connection between the device and WLAN access point is protected by means of an SSID and passphrase on the system side. Please contact the relevant system administrator for access. General notes on the use of passwords • The access code and network key supplied with the device should be changed during commissioning for safety reasons. • Follow the general rules for generating a secure password when defining and managing the access code and network key. • The user is responsible for the management and careful handling of the access code and network key. • For information on configuring the access code or on what to do if you lose the password, for example, see "Write protection via access code" → 139. 2.7.3 Access via web server The integrated web server can be used to operate and configure the device via a web browser → 80. The connection is established via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) or the WLAN interface. The web server is enabled when the device is delivered. The web server can be disabled via the Web server functionality parameter if necessary (e.g., after commissioning). The device and status information can be hidden on the login page. This prevents unauthorized access to the information. Detailed information on the device parameters: "Description of device parameters" document . 2.7.4 Access via service interface (CDI-RJ45) The device can be connected to a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45). Devicespecific functions guarantee the secure operation of the device in a network. The use of relevant industrial standards and guidelines that have been defined by national and international safety committees, such as IEC/ISA62443 or the IEEE, is recommended. This includes organizational security measures such as the assignment of access authorization as well as technical measures such as network segmentation. Transmitters with an Ex de approval may not be connected via the service interface (CDI-RJ45)! Order code for "Approval transmitter + sensor", options (Ex de): BA, BB, C1, C2, GA, GB, MA, MB, NA, NB BB, C2, GB, MB, NB 12 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 3 Product description Product description The measuring system consists of a transmitter and a sensor. The transmitter and sensor are mounted in physically separate locations. They are interconnected by connecting cables. 3.1 Product design Two versions of the transmitter are available. 3.1.1 Proline 500 – digital Signal transmission: digital Order code for "Integrated ISEM electronics", option A "Sensor" For use in applications not required to meet special requirements due to ambient or operating conditions. As the electronics are located in the sensor, the device is ideal: For simple transmitter replacement. • A standard cable can be used as the connecting cable. • Not sensitive to external EMC interference. 1 2 3 ES - C + - 4 5 A0029593 1 1 2 3 4 5 Endress+Hauser Important components of a measuring device Electronics compartment cover Display module Transmitter housing Sensor connection housing with integrated ISEM electronics: connecting cable connection Sensor 13 Product description Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 3.1.2 Proline 500 Signal transmission: analog Order code for "Integrated ISEM electronics", option B "Transmitter" For use in applications required to meet special requirements due to ambient or operating conditions. As the electronics are located in the transmitter, the device is ideal in the event of: • Sensor operation in underground installations. • Permanent sensor immersion in water. 2 1 4 3 un ter n f ne öf Nich Po Sp t an un w Do nu te er en no ngr er t öf Ne gi op fn so pa zeden when us s ou tens vr en ionir i sp la y e D Nicht I/O ar ES C – + circ E arealive uits Nic u ht nte r 7 6 5 A0029589 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 14 Important components of a measuring device Connection compartment cover Display module Transmitter housing with integrated ISEM electronics Electronics compartment cover Sensor Sensor connection housing: connecting cable connection Connection compartment cover: connecting cable connection Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Incoming acceptance and product identification 4 Incoming acceptance and product identification 4.1 Incoming acceptance On receipt of the delivery: 1. Check the packaging for damage. Report all damage immediately to the manufacturer. Do not install damaged components. 2. Check the scope of delivery using the delivery note. 3. Compare the data on the nameplate with the order specifications on the delivery note. 4. Check the technical documentation and all other necessary documents, e.g. certificates, to ensure they are complete. If one of the conditions is not satisfied, contact the manufacturer. 4.2 Product identification The device can be identified in the following ways: • Nameplate • Order code with details of the device features on the delivery note • Enter the serial numbers from the nameplates in the Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): all the information about the device is displayed. • Enter the serial numbers from the nameplates into the Endress+Hauser Operations app or scan the DataMatrix code on the nameplate with the Endress+Hauser Operations app: all the information about the device is displayed. For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the following: • The "Additional standard device documentation" and "Supplementary device-dependent documentation" sections • The Device Viewer: Enter the serial number from the nameplate (www.endress.com/deviceviewer) • The Endress+Hauser Operations app: Enter the serial number from the nameplate or scan the DataMatrix code on the nameplate. Endress+Hauser 15 Incoming acceptance and product identification 4.2.1 Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Transmitter nameplate Proline 500 – digital 1 2 3 4 18 17 16 15 14 Order code: Ser. no.: Ext. ord. cd.: 5 6 i 13 7 Date: i 12 11 10 9 8 A0029194 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 16 Example of a transmitter nameplate Name of the transmitter Manufacturer address/certificate holder Space for approvals: Use in hazardous areas Degree of protection Electrical connection data: available inputs and outputs Allowable ambient temperature (Ta) 2-D matrix code Space for approvals and certificates: e.g. CE mark, RCM tick Permitted temperature range for cable Date of manufacture: year-month Firmware version (FW) and device revision (Dev. rev.) from the factory Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation Space for additional information in the case of special products Available inputs and outputs, supply voltage Electrical connection data: supply voltage Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.) Serial number (Ser. no.) Order code Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Incoming acceptance and product identification Proline 500 1 2 3 4 5 Order code: Ser. no.: Ext. ord. cd.: 20 6 19 7 18 17 16 15 14 8 i i Date: 13 12 11 9 10 A0029192 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Endress+Hauser Example of a transmitter nameplate Manufacturer address/certificate holder Name of the transmitter Order code Serial number (Ser. no.) Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.) Degree of protection Space for approvals: use in hazardous areas Electrical connection data: available inputs and outputs 2-D matrix code Date of manufacture: year-month Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation Space for approvals and certificates: e.g. CE mark, RCM tick Space for degree of protection of connection and electronics compartment when used in hazardous areas Firmware version (FW) and device revision (Dev. rev.) from the factory Space for additional information in the case of special products Permitted temperature range for cable Allowable ambient temperature (Ta) Information on cable gland Available inputs and outputs, supply voltage Electrical connection data: supply voltage 17 Incoming acceptance and product identification 4.2.2 Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Sensor nameplate 1 2 3 4 5 Order code: Ser. no.: Ext. ord. cd.: 6 7 13 i i 8 Date: 12 11 9 10 A0029204 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Example of sensor nameplate Name of sensor Manufacturer address/certificate holder Order code Serial number (Ser. no.) Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.) Flow; nominal diameter of the sensor; pressure rating; nominal pressure; static pressure; medium temperature range; material of liner and electrodes Approval information for explosion protection, Pressure Equipment Directive and degree of protection Flow direction 2-D matrix code Date of manufacture: year-month Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation CE mark, RCM-Tick mark Permitted ambient temperature (Ta) Order code The measuring device is reordered using the order code. Extended order code • The device type (product root) and basic specifications (mandatory features) are always listed. • Of the optional specifications (optional features), only the safety and approvalrelated specifications are listed (e.g. LA). If other optional specifications are also ordered, these are indicated collectively using the # placeholder symbol (e.g. #LA#). • If the ordered optional specifications do not include any safety and approval-related specifications, they are indicated by the + placeholder symbol (e.g. XXXXXX-ABCDE +). 18 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 4.2.3 Symbol Incoming acceptance and product identification Symbols on the device Meaning WARNING! This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious or fatal injury. Please consult the documentation for the measuring instrument to discover the type of potential danger and measures to avoid it. Reference to documentation Refers to the corresponding device documentation. Protective ground connection A terminal that must be connected to the ground prior to establishing any other connections. Endress+Hauser 19 Storage and transport Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 5 Storage and transport 5.1 Storage conditions Observe the following notes for storage: ‣ Store in the original packaging to ensure protection from shock. ‣ Do not remove protective covers or protective caps installed on process connections. They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in the measuring tube. ‣ Protect from direct sunlight. Avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures. ‣ Select a storage location that excludes the possibility of condensation forming on the measuring device. Fungi and bacteria can damage the liner. ‣ Store in a dry and dust-free place. ‣ Do not store outdoors. Storage temperature → 193 5.2 Transporting the product Transport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging. A0029252 Do not remove protective covers or caps installed on process connections. They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in the measuring tube. 5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting lugs LWARNING Center of gravity of the measuring device is higher than the suspension points of the webbing slings. Risk of injury if the measuring device slips. ‣ Secure the measuring device against slipping or turning. ‣ Observe the weight specified on the packaging (stick-on label). A0029214 20 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 5.2.2 Mounting Measuring devices with lifting lugs LCAUTION Special transportation instructions for devices with lifting lugs ‣ Only use the lifting lugs fitted on the device or flanges to transport the device. ‣ The device must always be secured at two lifting lugs at least. 5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift If transporting in wood crates, the floor structure enables the crates to be lifted lengthwise or at both sides using a forklift. LCAUTION Risk of damaging the magnetic coil! ‣ If transporting by forklift, do not lift the sensor by the metal casing. ‣ This would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils. A0029319 5.3 Packaging disposal All packaging materials are environmentally friendly and 100% recyclable: • Outer packaging of device Stretch wrap made of polymer in accordance with EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS) • Packaging • Wood crate treated in accordance with ISPM 15 standard, confirmed by IPPC logo • Cardboard box in accordance with European packaging guideline 94/62/EC, recyclability confirmed by Resy symbol • Transport material and fastening fixtures • Disposable plastic pallet • Plastic straps • Plastic adhesive strips • Filler material Paper pads 6 Mounting 6.1 Mounting requirements 6.1.1 Mounting position Mounting location • Do not install the device at the highest point of the pipe. • Do not install the device upstream from a free pipe outlet in a down pipe. Endress+Hauser 21 Mounting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 A0042131 The device should ideally be installed in an ascending pipe. A0042317 Installation upstream from a down pipe NOTICE Negative pressure in the measuring pipe can damage the liner! ‣ If installing upstream of down pipes whose length h ≥ 5 m (16.4 ft): install a siphon with a vent valve downstream of the device. This arrangement prevents the flow of liquid stopping in the pipe and air entrainment. 1 h 2 A0028981 1 2 h Vent valve Pipe siphon Length of down pipe Installation with partially filled pipes • Partially filled pipes with a gradient require a drain-type configuration. • The installation of a cleaning valve is recommended. 22 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Mounting N ³2 ³5 xD xD N A0041088 Installation near pumps NOTICE Negative pressure in the measuring tube can damage the liner! ‣ In order to maintain the system pressure, install the device in the flow direction downstream from the pump. ‣ Install pulsation dampers if reciprocating, diaphragm or peristaltic pumps are used. A0041083 • Information on the liner's resistance to partial vacuum • Information on the measuring system's resistance to vibration and shock → 194 Installation in event of pipe vibrations NOTICE Pipe vibrations can damage the device! ‣ Do not expose the device to strong vibrations. ‣ Support the pipe and fix it in place. ‣ Support the device and fix it in place. L > 10 m (33 ft) A0041092 Information on the measuring system's resistance to vibration and shock → 194 Endress+Hauser 23 Mounting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Orientation The direction of the arrow on the nameplate helps you to install the measuring device according to the flow direction (direction of medium flow through the piping). Orientation Recommendation Vertical orientation A0015591 1) Horizontal orientation α A0041328 2) 3) Horizontal orientation, transmitter at bottom 4) A0015590 Horizontal orientation, transmitter at side A0015592 1) 2) 3) 4) The measuring device should be self-draining for hygiene applications. A vertical orientation is recommended for this. If only a horizontal orientation is possible, an angle of inclination α ≥ 10° is recommended. Applications with high process temperatures may increase the ambient temperature. To maintain the maximum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended. To prevent the electronics from overheating in the event of strong heat formation (e.g. CIP or SIP cleaning process), install the device with the transmitter part pointing downwards. With the empty pipe detection function switched on: empty pipe detection only works if the transmitter housing is pointing upwards. Vertical Optimum for self-emptying pipe systems and for use in conjunction with empty pipe detection. A0015591 Horizontal • Ideally, the measuring electrode plane should be horizontal. This prevents brief insulation of the measuring electrodes by entrained air bubbles. • Empty pipe detection only works if the transmitter housing is pointing upwards as otherwise there is no guarantee that the empty pipe detection function will actually respond to a partially filled or empty measuring tube. 24 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Mounting 1 2 2 A0028998 1 2 EPD electrode for empty pipe detection, available from ≥ DN 15 (½") Measuring electrodes for signal detection Measuring instruments with a nominal diameter < DN 15 (½") do not have an EPD electrode. In this case, empty pipe detection is performed via the measuring electrodes. Inlet and outlet runs Installation with inlet and outlet runs To avoid a vacuum and to maintain the specified level of measurement accuracy, install the device upstream from assemblies that produce turbulence (e.g. valves, T-sections) and downstream from pumps. Maintain straight, unimpeded inlet and outlet runs. ≥ 5 × DN ≥ 2 × DN ≥ 2 × DN A0028997 A0042132 Installation dimensions For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section Endress+Hauser 25 Mounting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 6.1.2 Environmental and process requirements Ambient temperature range Transmitter • Standard: –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F) • Optional: –50 to +60 °C (–58 to +140 °F) (Order code for "Test, certificate", option JN "Ambient temperature of transmitter –50 °C (–58 °F)") Local display –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F), the readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside the temperature range. Sensor –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F) Liner Do not exceed or fall below the permitted temperature range of the liner . If operating outdoors: • Install the measuring device in a shady location. • Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions. • Avoid direct exposure to weather conditions. System pressure Installation near pumps → 23 Vibrations Installation in event of pipe vibrations → 23 Adapters The sensor can also be installed in larger-diameter pipes with the aid of suitable adapters according to DIN EN 545 (double-flange reducers). The resultant increase in the rate of flow improves measuring accuracy with very slow-moving fluids. The nomogram shown here can be used to calculate the pressure loss caused by reducers and expanders. • The nomogram only applies to liquids with a viscosity similar to that of water. • If the medium has a high viscosity, a larger measuring tube diameter can be considered in order to reduce pressure loss. 26 1. Calculate the ratio of the diameters d/D. 2. From the nomogram read off the pressure loss as a function of flow velocity (downstream from the reduction) and the d/D ratio. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Mounting 100 [mbar] 8 m/s 7 m/s 6 m/s 5 m/s 4 m/s 10 3 m/s max. 8° 2 m/s d D 1 m/s 1 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 d/D A0029002 Length of connecting cable Proline 500 – digital transmitter Lengths of connecting cable → 38 Proline 500 transmitter Max. 200 m (650 ft) To obtain correct measurement results, observe the permitted connecting cable length of Lmax. This length is determined by the conductivity of the medium. If measuring liquids in general: 5 µS/cm [µS/cm] 200 100 L max 5 [m] 10 100 200 [ft] 0 30 60 300 L max 600 A0016539 6 Permitted length of connecting cable Colored area = permitted range Lmax= length of connecting cable in [m] ([ft]) [µS/cm] = medium conductivity Endress+Hauser 27 Mounting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 6.1.3 Special mounting instructions 203 (8.0) 243 (9.6) 213 (8.4) 39 (1.5) Weather protection cover A0029552 7 Weather protection cover for Proline 500 – digital; engineering unit mm (in) 280 (11.0) 134 (5.3) 12 (0.47) 30 (1.18) 48 (1.9) 146 (5.75) 255 (10.0) A0029553 8 Weather protection cover for Proline 500; engineering unit mm (in) Hygienic compatibility When installing in hygienic applications, please refer to the information in the "Certificates and approvals/hygienic compatibility" section → 205 6.2 Mounting the measuring instrument 6.2.1 Required tools For transmitter For mounting on a post: • Proline 500 – digital transmitter • Open-ended wrench AF 10 • Torx screwdriver TX 25 • Proline 500 transmitter Open-ended wrench AF 13 For wall mounting: Drill with drill bit ⌀ 6.0 mm 28 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Mounting For sensor For flanges and other process connections: Use a suitable mounting tool. 6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device 1. Remove all remaining transport packaging. 2. Remove any protective covers or protective caps present from the sensor. 3. Remove stick-on label on the electronics compartment cover. 6.2.3 Mounting the sensor LWARNING Danger due to improper process sealing! ‣ Ensure that the inside diameters of the gaskets are greater than or equal to that of the process connections and piping. ‣ Ensure that the seals are clean and undamaged. ‣ Secure the seals correctly. 1. Ensure that the direction of the arrow on the sensor matches the flow direction of the medium. 2. To ensure compliance with device specifications, install the measuring device between the pipe flanges in a way that it is centered in the measurement section. 3. Install the measuring device or turn the transmitter housing so that the cable entries do not point upwards. A0029263 The sensor is supplied to order, with or without pre-installed process connections. Preinstalled process connections are firmly secured to the sensor by 4 or 6 hexagonal-headed bolts. ‣ Depending on the application and pipe length: Support the sensor or secure it additionally. ‣ If using plastic process connections: It is absolutely essential to secure the sensor. An appropriate wall mounting kit can be ordered separately as an accessory from Endress+Hauser → 207. Welding the sensor into the pipe (welding nipples) LWARNING Risk of destroying the electronics! ‣ Make sure that the welding system is not grounded via the sensor or transmitter. 1. Endress+Hauser Tack-weld the sensor to secure it in the pipe. A suitable welding jig can be ordered separately as an accessory → 207. 29 Mounting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 2. Loosen the screws on the process connection flange and remove the sensor, along with the seal, from the pipe. 3. Weld the process connection into the pipe. 4. Reinstall the sensor in the pipe, and in doing so make sure that the seal is clean and in the right position. ‣ If thin-walled pipes carrying food are welded correctly: Disassemble the sensor and seal even if the seal is not damaged by the heat when mounted. It must be possible to open the pipe by at least 8 mm (0.31 in) for disassembly. Mounting the seals Comply with the following instructions when installing seals: 1. In the case of metal process connections, the screws must be tightened securely. The process connection forms a metal connection with the sensor, which ensures a defined compression of the seal. 2. In the case of plastic process connections, observe the maximum torques for lubricated threads: 7 Nm (5.2 lbf ft); always insert a seal between the connection and the counterflange in the case of plastic flanges. 3. Depending on the application the seals should be replaced periodically, particularly if gasket seals are used (aseptic version)! The interval between changes depends on the frequency of the cleaning cycles, the cleaning temperature and the medium temperature. Replacement seals can be ordered as an accessory → 207. Mounting grounding rings (DN 2 to 25 (1/12 to 1")) Pay attention to the information on potential equalization . In the case of plastic process connections (e.g. flange connections or adhesive fittings), additional grounding rings must be used to ensure potential matching between the sensor and the fluid. If grounding rings are not installed, this can affect the measuring accuracy or cause the destruction of the sensor as a result of the electrochemical decomposition of the electrodes. • Depending on the option ordered, plastic disks are used instead of grounding rings on some process connections. These plastic disks only act as "spacers" and do not have any potential matching function. Furthermore, they also perform a significant sealing function at the sensor/process connection interface. Therefore, in the case of process connections without metal grounding rings, these plastic disks/seals should never be removed and should always be installed! • Grounding rings can be ordered separately as an accessory from Endress+Hauser → 207. When ordering make sure that the grounding rings are compatible with the material used for the electrodes, as otherwise there is the danger that the electrodes could be destroyed by electrochemical corrosion! Material specifications → 199. • Grounding rings, including seals, are mounted inside the process connections. This does not affect the installed length. 30 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Mounting 1 4 2 3 2 A0028971 9 Installing grounding rings 1 2 3 4 Hexagonal-headed bolts of process connection O-ring seals Grounding ring or plastic disk (spacer) Sensor 1. Loosen the 4 or 6 hexagonal-headed bolts (1) and remove the process connection from the sensor (4). 2. Remove the plastic disk (3), along with the two O-ring seals (2), from the process connection. 3. Place the first O-ring seal (2) back into the groove of the process connection. 4. Fit the metal grounding ring (3) in the process connection as illustrated. 5. Place the second O-ring seal (2) into the groove of the grounding ring. 6. Mount the process connection back on the sensor. When doing so, make sure to observe the maximum screw tightening torques for lubricated threads: 7 Nm (5.2 lbf ft) 6.2.4 Mounting the transmitter housing: Proline 500 – digital LCAUTION Ambient temperature too high! Danger of electronics overheating and housing deformation. ‣ Do not exceed the permitted maximum ambient temperature. → 26 ‣ If operating outdoors: Avoid direct sunlight and exposure to weathering, particularly in warm climatic regions. LCAUTION Excessive force can damage the housing! ‣ Avoid excessive mechanical stress. The transmitter can be mounted in the following ways: • Post mounting • Wall mounting Pipe mounting Required tools: • Open-ended wrench AF 10 • Torx screwdriver TX 25 Endress+Hauser 31 Mounting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 NOTICE Excessive tightening torque applied to the fixing screws! Risk of damaging the plastic transmitter. ‣ Tighten the fixing screws as per the tightening torque: 2.5 Nm (1.8 lbf ft) ø 20…70 (ø 0.79…2.75) 4x 3x TX 25 SW 10 ~1 0 ~4 2( .0) A0029051 10 Unit mm (in) Wall mounting Required tools: Drill with drill bit ⌀ 6.0 mm 17 (0.67) = = L 211 (8.31) 5.8 (0.23) 5.8 (0.23) 149 (5.85) A0029054 11 L Engineering unit mm (in) Depends on order code for "Transmitter housing" Order code for "Transmitter housing" Option A, aluminum, coated: L = 14 mm (0.55 in) 1. 32 Drill the holes. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Mounting 2. Insert wall plugs into the drilled holes. 3. Screw in the fixing screws slightly. 4. Fit the transmitter housing over the fixing screws and mount in place. 5. Tighten the fixing screws. 6.2.5 Mounting the transmitter housing: Proline 500 LCAUTION Ambient temperature too high! Danger of electronics overheating and housing deformation. ‣ Do not exceed the permitted maximum ambient temperature. → 26 ‣ If operating outdoors: Avoid direct sunlight and exposure to weathering, particularly in warm climatic regions. LCAUTION Excessive force can damage the housing! ‣ Avoid excessive mechanical stress. The transmitter can be mounted in the following ways: • Post mounting • Wall mounting Wall mounting Required tools Drill with drill bit ⌀ 6.0 mm ! 18 (0.71) ! 8.6 (0.39) 20 (0.79) 100 (3.94) ! 10 (0.39) 100 (3.94) A0029068 12 Engineering unit mm (in) 1. Drill the holes. 2. Insert wall plugs into the drilled holes. 3. Screw in the fixing screws slightly. 4. Fit the transmitter housing over the fixing screws and mount in place. 5. Tighten the fixing screws. Pipe mounting Required tools Open-ended wrench AF 13 Endress+Hauser 33 Mounting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 ! 20…70 (! 0.79 to 2.75) 1 4x SW 13 A0029057 13 Engineering unit mm (in) 6.2.6 Turning the transmitter housing: Proline 500 To provide easier access to the connection compartment or display module, the transmitter housing can be turned. 2. A 1. 4 mm 7 Nm (5.2 lbf !) 3. A A0043150 14 Ex housing 1. Loosen the fixing screws. 2. Turn the housing to the desired position. 3. Tighten the securing screws. 6.2.7 Turning the display module: Proline 500 The display module can be turned to optimize display readability and operability. 34 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Mounting n f ne öf Nicht Nicht un te r un te r n f ne öf ES ES C C – – + + ES C E – E ar e E ar 2. 3 mm 1. e + 3. A0030035 1. Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover. 2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover. 3. Turn the display module to the desired position: max. 8 × 45° in each direction. 4. Screw on the connection compartment cover. 5. Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover. 6.3 Post-mounting check Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)? Does the measuring device conform to the measuring point specifications? For example: • Process temperature • Pressure (refer to the section on "Pressure-temperature ratings" in the "Technical Information" document. • Ambient temperature • Measuring range Has the correct orientation been selected for the sensor → 24 ? • According to sensor type • According to medium temperature • According to medium properties (outgassing, with entrained solids) Endress+Hauser Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the actual direction of flow of the fluid through the piping → 24? Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)? Have the fixing screws been tightened with the correct tightening torque? 35 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 7 Electrical connection LWARNING Live parts! Incorrect work performed on the electrical connections can result in an electric shock. ‣ Set up a disconnecting device (switch or power-circuit breaker) to easily disconnect the device from the supply voltage. ‣ In addition to the device fuse, include an overcurrent protection unit with max. 10 A in the plant installation. 7.1 Electrical safety In accordance with applicable national regulations. 7.2 Connecting requirements 7.2.1 Required tools • For cable entries: use appropriate tool • For securing clamp: Allen key 3 mm • Wire stripper • When using stranded cables: crimper for wire end ferrule • For removing cables from terminal: flat blade screwdriver ≤ 3 mm (0.12 in) 7.2.2 Requirements for connection cable The connecting cables provided by the customer must fulfill the following requirements. Protective grounding cable for the outer ground terminal Conductor cross-section < 2.1 mm2 (14 AWG) The use of a cable lug enables the connection of larger cross-sections. The grounding impedance must be less than 2 Ω. Permitted temperature range • The installation guidelines that apply in the country of installation must be observed. • The cables must be suitable for the minimum and maximum temperatures to be expected. Power supply cable (incl. conductor for the inner ground terminal) Standard installation cable is sufficient. Signal cable Modbus RS485 The EIA/TIA-485 standard specifies two types of cable (A and B) for the bus line which can be used for every transmission rate. Cable type A is recommended. 36 Cable type A Characteristic impedance 135 to 165 Ω at a measuring frequency of 3 to 20 MHz Cable capacitance < 30 pF/m Wire cross-section > 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection Cable type Twisted pairs Loop resistance ≤110 Ω/km Signal damping Max. 9 dB over the entire length of the cable cross-section Shield Copper braided shielding or braided shielding with foil shield. When grounding the cable shield, observe the grounding concept of the plant. Current output 0/4 to 20 mA Standard installation cable is sufficient. Pulse /frequency /switch output Standard installation cable is sufficient. Double pulse output Standard installation cable is sufficient. Relay output Standard installation cable is sufficient. Current input 0/4 to 20 mA Standard installation cable is sufficient. Status input Standard installation cable is sufficient. Cable diameter • Cable glands supplied: M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in) • Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules. Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG). Endress+Hauser 37 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Choice of connecting cable between the transmitter and sensor Depends on the type of transmitter and the installation zones 4 1 1 A 3 2 1 5 A 3 A B 1 3 A 3 2 3 6 B 3 A0032477 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B Proline 500 digital transmitter Proline 500 transmitter Promag sensor Non-hazardous area Hazardous area: Zone 2; Class I, Division 2 Hazardous area: Zone 1; Class I, Division 1 Standard cable to 500 digital transmitter → 38 Transmitter installed in the non-hazardous area or hazardous area: Zone 2; Class I, Division 2 / sensor installed in the hazardous area: Zone 2; Class I, Division 2 or Zone 1; Class I, Division 1 Signal cable to 500 transmitter → 39 Transmitter and sensor installed in the hazardous area: Zone 2; Class I, Division 2 or Zone 1; Class I, Division 1 A: Connecting cable between sensor and transmitter: Proline 500 – digital Standard cable A standard cable with the following specifications can be used as the connecting cable. Design 4 cores (2 pairs); uninsulated stranded CU wires; pair-stranded with common shield Shielding Tin-plated copper braid, optical cover ≥ 85 % Cable length Maximum 300 m (900 ft), see the following table. Cable lengths for use in Non-hazardous area, Hazardous area: Zone 2; Class I, Division 2 Hazardous area: Zone 1; Class I, Division 1 0.34 mm2 (AWG 22) 80 m (240 ft) 50 m (150 ft) 0.50 mm2 (AWG 20) 120 m (360 ft) 60 m (180 ft) 0.75 mm2 (AWG 18) 180 m (540 ft) 90 m (270 ft) 1.00 mm2 (AWG 17) 240 m (720 ft) 120 m (360 ft) Cross-section 38 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection Cable lengths for use in Non-hazardous area, Hazardous area: Zone 2; Class I, Division 2 Hazardous area: Zone 1; Class I, Division 1 1.50 mm2 (AWG 15) 300 m (900 ft) 180 m (540 ft) 2.50 mm2 (AWG 13) 300 m (900 ft) 300 m (900 ft) Cross-section Optionally available connecting cable Design 2 × 2 × 0.34 mm2 (AWG 22) PVC cable 1) with common shield (2 pairs, uninsulated stranded CU wires; pair-stranded) Flame resistance According to DIN EN 60332-1-2 Oil-resistance According to DIN EN 60811-2-1 Shielding Tin-plated copper braid, optical cover ≥ 85 % Operating temperature When mounted in a fixed position: –50 to +105 °C (–58 to +221 °F); when cable can move freely: –25 to +105 °C (–13 to +221 °F) Available cable length Fixed: 20 m (60 ft); variable: up to maximum 50 m (150 ft) 1) UV radiation can impair the cable outer sheath. Protect the cable from direct sunshine where possible. B: Connecting cable between sensor and transmitter: Proline 500 Signal cable Design 3 × 0.38 mm2 (20 AWG) with common, braided copper shield (⌀ 9.5 mm (0.37 in)) and individual shielded cores Conductor resistance ≤ 50 Ω/km (0.015 Ω/ft) Capacitance: core/shield ≤ 420 pF/m (128 pF/ft) Cable length (max.) Depends on the medium conductivity, max. 200 m (656 ft) Cable lengths (available for order) 5 m (15 ft), 10 m (30 ft), 20 m (60 ft) or variable length up to max. 200 m (600 ft) Cable diameter 9.4 mm (0.37 in) ± 0.5 mm (0.02 in) Operating temperature –20 to +80 °C (–4 to +176 °F) Coil current cable Endress+Hauser Design 3 × 0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) with common, braided copper shield (⌀ 9 mm (0.35 in)) and individual shielded cores Conductor resistance ≤ 37 Ω/km (0.011 Ω/ft) Capacitance: core/core, shield grounded ≤ 120 pF/m (37 pF/ft) Cable length (max.) Depends on the medium conductivity, max. 200 m (656 ft) Cable lengths (available for order) 5 m (15 ft), 10 m (30 ft), 20 m (60 ft) or variable length up to max. 200 m (600 ft) Cable diameter 8.8 mm (0.35 in) ± 0.5 mm (0.02 in) Continuous operating temperature –20 to +80 °C (–4 to +176 °F) Test voltage for cable insulation ≤ AC 1433 V rms 50/60 Hz or ≥ DC 2026 V 39 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 b a A0029151 15 a b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Cable cross-section Electrode cable Coil current cable Core Core insulation Core shield Core jacket Core reinforcement Cable shield Outer jacket Operation in zones of severe electrical interference The measuring system meets the general safety requirements → 206 and EMC specifications → 194. Grounding is by means of the ground terminal provided for the purpose inside the connection housing. The stripped and twisted lengths of cable shield to the ground terminal must be as short as possible. 7.2.3 Terminal assignment Transmitter: supply voltage, input/outputs The terminal assignment of the inputs and outputs depends on the individual order version of the device. The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover. Supply voltage 1 (+) 2 (–) Input/output 1 26 (B) 27 (A) Input/output 2 24 (+) 25 (–) Input/output 3 22 (+) 23 (–) Input/output 4 20 (+) 21 (–) Device-specific terminal assignment: adhesive label in terminal cover. Transmitter and sensor connection housing: connecting cable The sensor and transmitter, which are mounted in separate locations, are interconnected by a connecting cable. The cable is connected via the sensor connection housing and the transmitter housing. Terminal assignment and connection of the connecting cable: • Proline 500 – digital → 44 • Proline 500 → 51 7.2.4 Shielding and grounding Shielding and grounding concept 40 1. Maintain electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). 2. Take explosion protection into consideration. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection 3. Pay attention to the protection of persons. 4. Comply with national installation regulations and guidelines. 5. Observe cable specifications . 6. Keep the stripped and twisted lengths of cable shield to the ground terminal as short as possible. 7. Shield cables fully. Grounding of the cable shield NOTICE In systems without potential matching, the multiple grounding of the cable shield causes mains frequency equalizing currents! Damage to the bus cable shield. ‣ Only ground the bus cable shield to either the local ground or the protective ground at one end. ‣ Insulate the shield that is not connected. To comply with EMC requirements: 1. Ensure the cable shield is grounded to the potential matching line at multiple points. 2. Connect every local ground terminal to the potential matching line. 7.2.5 Preparing the measuring device Carry out the steps in the following order: 1. Mount the sensor and transmitter. 2. Sensor connection housing: Connect connecting cable. 3. Transmitter: Connect connecting cable. 4. Transmitter: Connect signal cable and cable for supply voltage. NOTICE Insufficient sealing of the housing! Operational reliability of the measuring device could be compromised. ‣ Use suitable cable glands corresponding to the degree of protection. Endress+Hauser 1. Remove dummy plug if present. 2. If the measuring device is supplied without cable glands: Provide suitable cable gland for corresponding connecting cable. 3. If the measuring device is supplied with cable glands: Observe requirements for connecting cables → 36. 41 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 7.2.6 Preparing the connecting cable: Proline 500 – digital When terminating the connecting cable, pay attention to the following points: ‣ For cables with fine-wire cores (stranded cables): Fit the cores with ferrules. Transmitter Sensor 70 (2.76) 50 (1.97) 8 (0.3) 10 (0.4) 70 (2.76) 40(1.57) 8 (0.31) A 1 A B A0029546 1 B A0029442 Engineering unit mm (in) A = Terminate the cable B = Fit ferrules on cables with fine-wire cores (stranded cables) 1 = Red ferrules, 1.0 mm (0.04 in) 7.2.7 Preparing the connecting cable: Proline 500 When terminating the connecting cable, pay attention to the following points: 42 1. In the case of the electrode cable: Make sure that the ferrules do not touch the core shields on the sensor side. Minimum distance = 1 mm (exception: green “GND” cable) 2. In the case of the coil current cable: Insulate one core of the three-core cable at the level of the core reinforcement. You only require two cores for the connection. 3. For cables with fine-wire cores (stranded cables): Fit the cores with ferrules. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection Transmitter Electrode cable Coil current cable 17 (0.67) 8 (0.3) 70 (2.76) 50 (1.97) 8 (0.3) 10 (0.4) 80 (3.15) 50 (1.97) A A 1 2 1 1 2 1 B GND 2 2 B A0029544 A0029543 Sensor Electrode cable Coil current cable 70 (2.76) 80 (3.15) 17 (0.67) 8 (0.31) 40(1.57) 8 (0.31) GND A A ≥ 1 (0.04) B 1 2 GND B 1 A0029438 A0029439 Engineering unit mm (in) A = Terminate the cable B = Fit ferrules on cables with fine-wire cores (stranded cables) 1 = Red ferrules, 1.0 mm (0.04 in) 2 = White ferrules, 0.5 mm (0.02 in) Endress+Hauser 43 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 7.3 Connecting the measuring instrument: Proline 500 digital NOTICE An incorrect connection compromises electrical safety! ‣ Only properly trained specialist staff may perform electrical connection work. ‣ Observe applicable federal/national installation codes and regulations. ‣ Comply with local workplace safety regulations. ‣ Always connect the protective ground cable before connecting additional cables. ‣ When using in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in the device-specific Ex documentation. 7.3.1 Connecting the connecting cable LWARNING Risk of damaging electronic components! ‣ Connect the sensor and transmitter to the same potential equalization. ‣ Only connect the sensor to a transmitter with the same serial number. ‣ Ground the connection housing of the sensor via the external screw terminal. Connecting cable terminal assignment 1 2 3 5 6 + – B A 61 62 63 64 4 62 61 64 63 4 – + A B A0028198 1 2 3 4 5 6 Cable entry for cable on transmitter housing Protective earth (PE) Connecting cable ISEM communication Grounding via ground connection; in the version with a device plug, grounding is ensured through the plug itself Cable entry for cable or connection of device plug on sensor connection housing Protective earth (PE) Connecting the connecting cable to the sensor connection housing • Connection via terminals with order code for "Sensor connection housing": Option B "Stainless, hygienic" → 46 • Connection via connectors with order code for "Sensor connection housing": Option C "Ultra-compact hygienic, stainless" → 47 Connecting the connecting cable to the transmitter The cable is connected to the transmitter via terminals → 48. 44 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection Connecting the sensor connection housing via terminals For the device version with the order code for "Sensor connection housing": Option A "Aluminum coated" 2. 10 (0.4) 3 mm 1. TX 20 5. 7. 22 mm 3. 24 mm 6. A0029616 1. Loosen the securing clamp of the housing cover. 2. Unscrew the housing cover. 3. Push the cable through the cable entry. To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the sealing ring from the cable entry. 4. Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, fit ferrules. 5. Connect the protective ground. 6. Connect the cable in accordance with the connecting cable terminal assignment. 7. Firmly tighten the cable glands. This concludes the process for connecting the connecting cable. LWARNING Housing degree of protection voided due to insufficient sealing of the housing. ‣ Screw in the thread on the cover without using any lubricant. The thread on the cover is coated with a dry lubricant. Endress+Hauser 8. Screw on the housing cover. 9. Tighten the securing clamp of the housing cover. 45 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Connecting the sensor connection housing via terminals For the device version with the order code for "Sensor connection housing": Option B "Stainless, hygienic" 2. 10 (0.4) 1. 8 mm 5. 7. 22 mm 3. 24 mm 6. A0029613 46 1. Release the securing screw of the housing cover. 2. Open the housing cover. 3. Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the sealing ring from the cable entry. 4. Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, fit ferrules. 5. Connect the protective ground. 6. Connect the cable in accordance with the connecting cable terminal assignment. 7. Firmly tighten the cable glands. This concludes the process for connecting the connecting cable. 8. Close the housing cover. 9. Tighten the securing screw of the housing cover. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection Connecting the sensor connection housing via the connector For the device version with the order code for "Sensor connection housing": Option C "Ultra-compact hygienic, stainless" 1. 2. A0029615 Endress+Hauser 1. Connect the protective ground. 2. Connect the connector. 47 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Connecting the connecting cable to the transmitter 1. 4 x 3. TX 20 2. 5. 8. 4. 10 (0.4) 22 mm 24 mm 7. 6. A0029597 1. Loosen the 4 fixing screws on the housing cover. 2. Open the housing cover. 3. Fold open the terminal cover. 4. Push the cable through the cable entry. To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the sealing ring from the cable entry. 5. Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, fit ferrules. 6. Connect the protective ground. 7. Connect the cable according to the terminal assignment for the connecting cable → 44. 8. Firmly tighten the cable glands. The process for connecting the connecting cable is now complete. 9. Close the housing cover. 10. Tighten the securing screw of the housing cover. 11. After connecting the connecting cable: Connect the signal cable and the supply voltage cable → 49. 48 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection 7.3.2 Connecting the signal cable and the supply voltage cable 1 2 3 6 4 5 A0028200 1 2 3 4 5 6 Terminal connection for supply voltage Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output Terminal connection for connecting cable between sensor and transmitter Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output; optional: connection for external WLAN antenna Protective earth (PE) 1. 4 x 3. TX 20 2. 5. 8. 4. 10 (0.4) 22 mm 24 mm 7. 6. A0029597 1. Loosen the 4 fixing screws on the housing cover. 2. Open the housing cover. 3. Fold open the terminal cover. 4. Push the cable through the cable entry. To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the sealing ring from the cable entry. 5. Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, fit ferrules. 6. Connect the protective ground. 7. Connect the cable according to the terminal assignment. Signal cable terminal assignment: The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover. Supply voltage terminal assignment: Adhesive label in the terminal cover or → 40. 8. Firmly tighten the cable glands. This concludes the cable connection process. 9. Close the terminal cover. 10. Close the housing cover. Endress+Hauser 49 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 LWARNING Housing degree of protection may be voided due to insufficient sealing of the housing. ‣ Screw in the screw without using any lubricant. NOTICE Excessive tightening torque applied to the fixing screws! Risk of damaging the plastic transmitter. ‣ Tighten the fixing screws as per the tightening torque: 2.5 Nm (1.8 lbf ft) 11. Tighten the 4 fixing screws on the housing cover. Removing a cable To remove a cable from the terminal: 3 (0.12) 1. 2. A0029598 16 50 Engineering unit mm (in) 1. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to press down on the slot between the two terminal holes. 2. Remove the cable end from the terminal. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 7.4 Electrical connection Connecting the measuring instrument: Proline 500 NOTICE An incorrect connection compromises electrical safety! ‣ Only properly trained specialist staff may perform electrical connection work. ‣ Observe applicable federal/national installation codes and regulations. ‣ Comply with local workplace safety regulations. ‣ Always connect the protective ground cable before connecting additional cables. ‣ When using in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in the device-specific Ex documentation. 7.4.1 Connecting the connecting cable LWARNING Risk of damaging electronic components! ‣ Connect the sensor and transmitter to the same potential equalization. ‣ Only connect the sensor to a transmitter with the same serial number. ‣ Ground the connection housing of the sensor via the external screw terminal. LCAUTION Measurement error due to shortening of the connecting cable ‣ The connecting cable is ready for installation and must be used in the length supplied. Shortening the connecting cable can affect the sensor's measurement accuracy. Connecting cable terminal assignment 1 2 3 4 5 ER ER S1 E1 E2 S2 GND E 41 42 6 5 7 S 8 4 37 36 n.c. n.c. 6 7 8 n.c. 41 42 5 7 4 37 ER ER E1 E2 GND E 3 5 A0029444 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Protective earth (PE) Cable entry for coil current cable on transmitter connection housing Coil current cable Cable entry for signal cable on transmitter connection housing Signal cable Cable entry for signal cable on sensor connection housing Protective earth (PE) Cable entry for coil current cable on sensor connection housing Connecting the connecting cable to the sensor connection housing Connection via terminals with order code for "Sensor connection housing": Option B "Stainless, hygienic" → 52 Endress+Hauser 51 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Connecting the sensor connection housing via terminals For the device version, order code for "Sensor connection housing": Option B: stainless, hygienic 1. 2x 2. 10 (0.4) 8 mm 5. 7. 22 mm 24 mm 3. 6. A0029617 52 1. Release the securing screw of the housing cover. 2. Open the housing cover. 3. Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the sealing ring from the cable entry. 4. Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, fit ferrules. 5. Connect the protective ground. 6. Connect the cable in accordance with the connecting cable terminal assignment. 7. Firmly tighten the cable glands. This concludes the process for connecting the connecting cables. 8. Close the housing cover. 9. Tighten the securing screw of the housing cover. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection Attaching the connecting cable to the transmitter 10 (0.4) n fne öf 5. e Nicht un te r 3. ar 3 mm circ 1. Nic u ht nte r 2. 6. arealive uits 7. 22 mm 24 mm A0029592 1. Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover. 2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover. 3. Push the cable through the cable entry. To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the sealing ring from the cable entry. 4. Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, also fit ferrules. 5. Connect the protective ground. 6. Connect the cable in accordance with the connecting cable terminal assignment → 51. 7. Firmly tighten the cable glands. This concludes the process for connecting the connecting cables. 8. Screw on the connection compartment cover. 9. Tighten the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover. 10. After connecting the connecting cables: Connect the signal cable and the supply voltage cable → 54. Endress+Hauser 53 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 7.4.2 Connecting the signal cable and the supply voltage cable 1 2 3 4 A0026781 1 2 3 4 Terminal connection for supply voltage Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output or terminal connection for network connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45) Protective earth (PE) 3. n f ne öf Nicht Nicht un ter un te r n f ne öf ES C ES C – – + + E E ES C + ar ar 4. 1. 3 mm 2. e e – E 3. A0029813 1. Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover. 2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover. 3. Squeeze the tabs of the display module holder together. 4. Remove the display module holder. Ni Spcht Pow an un Do nu te er en no ngr er t op öf fn Ne gize so pa den when us s ou tens vr en ionir un te r 6. er Powr en te fn n un g öf whe en ichtnnun Npa t op d vrir S noze Doergis ouion ene patens N us so I/O Nicht un te r Nicht I/O n f ne öf n f ne öf Ni Spcht Pow an un Do nu te er en no ngr er t op öf fn Ne gize so pa den when us s ou tens vr en ionir e e I/O ar ar ES ES C – C – + + E E 5. A0029814 54 5. Attach the holder to the edge of the electronics compartment. 6. Open the terminal cover. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection 8. 10 (0.4) 7. e Nicht un ter n f ne öf mm (in) ar ES C – + 9. E A0029815 7. Push the cable through the cable entry. To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the sealing ring from the cable entry. 8. Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, also fit ferrules. 9. Connect the protective ground. 11. n f ne öf Nicht un te r 22 mm e 24 mm ar ES C – + E 10. A0029816 10. Connect the cable according to the terminal assignment. Signal cable terminal assignment: The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover. Supply voltage connection terminal assignment: Adhesive label in the terminal cover or → 40. 11. Firmly tighten the cable glands. This concludes the cable connection process. 12. Close the terminal cover. 13. Fit the display module holder in the electronics compartment. 14. Screw on the connection compartment cover. 15. Secure the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover. Removing a cable To remove a cable from the terminal: Endress+Hauser 55 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 3 (0.12) 1. 2. A0029598 17 Engineering unit mm (in) 1. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to press down on the slot between the two terminal holes. 2. Remove the cable end from the terminal. 7.5 Ensuring potential equalization 7.5.1 Requirements For potential equalization: • Pay attention to in-house grounding concepts • Take account of operating conditions like the pipe material and grounding • Connect the medium, sensor and transmitter to the same electric potential • Use a ground cable with a minimum cross-section of 6 mm2 (10 AWG) and a cable lug for potential equalization connections 7.5.2 Connection example, standard scenario Metal process connections Potential equalization is generally via the metal process connections that are in contact with the medium and mounted directly on the sensor. Therefore there is generally no need for additional potential equalization measures. 7.5.3 Connection example in special situations Plastic process connections In the case of plastic process connections, additional grounding rings or process connections with an integrated grounding electrode must be used to ensure potential matching between the sensor and the fluid. If there is no potential matching, this can affect the measuring accuracy or cause the destruction of the sensor as a result of the electrochemical decomposition of the electrodes. 56 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection Note the following when using grounding rings: • Depending on the option ordered, plastic disks are used instead of grounding rings on some process connections. These plastic disks only act as "spacers" and do not have any potential matching function. Furthermore, they also perform a significant sealing function at the sensor/connection interface. Therefore, in the case of process connections without metal grounding rings, these plastic disks/seals should never be removed and should always be installed! • Grounding rings can be ordered separately as accessory DK5HR* from Endress+Hauser (does not contain any seals). When ordering make sure that the grounding rings are compatible with the material used for the electrodes, as otherwise there is the danger that the electrodes could be destroyed by electrochemical corrosion! • If seals are required, they can be additionally ordered with seal set DK5G*. • Grounding rings including seals are mounted inside the process connections. This does not affect the installed length. Potential equalization via additional grounding ring 1 4 2 3 2 A0028971 1 2 3 4 Hexagonal-headed bolts of process connection O-ring seals Plastic disk (spacer) or grounding ring Sensor Potential equalization via grounding electrodes on process connection 2 1 3 4 A0028972 1 2 3 4 Endress+Hauser Hexagonal-headed bolts of process connection Integrated grounding electrodes O-ring seal Sensor 57 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 7.6 Special connection instructions 7.6.1 Connection examples Modbus RS485 1 3 2 A A 4 B B A 4 B A0028765 18 1 2 3 4 Connection example for Modbus RS485, non-hazardous area and Zone 2/Div. 2 Control system (e.g. PLC) Ground cable shield at one end. The cable shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with EMC requirements; observe cable specifications Distribution box Transmitter Current output 4-20 mA 1 2 3 4...20 mA A0028758 19 1 2 3 Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (active) Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC) Analog display unit: observe maximum load Transmitter 1 2 3 4 4...20 mA A0028759 20 1 2 3 4 58 Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (passive) Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC) Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N) Analog display unit: observe maximum load Transmitter Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection Pulse/frequency output 1 2 3 12345 A0028761 21 1 2 3 Connection example for pulse/frequency output (passive) Automation system with pulse/frequency input (e.g. PLC with 10 kΩ pull-up or pull-down resistor) Power supply Transmitter: observe input values → 184 Switch output 1 2 3 A0028760 22 1 2 3 Connection example for switch output (passive) Automation system with switch input (e.g. PLC with a 10 kΩ pull-up or pull-down resistor) Power supply Transmitter: observe input values → 184 Double pulse output 1 3 2 4 A0029280 23 1 2 3 4 Endress+Hauser Connection example for double pulse output (active) Automation system with double pulse input (e.g. PLC) Transmitter: observe input values → 185 Double pulse output Double pulse output (slave), phase-shifted 59 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 2 1 4 3 5 A0029279 24 1 2 3 4 5 Connection example for double pulse output (passive) Automation system with double pulse input (e.g. PLC with a 10 kΩ pull-up or pull-down resistor) Power supply Transmitter: observe input values → 185 Double pulse output Double pulse output (slave), phase-shifted Relay output 1 2 3 A0028760 25 1 2 3 Connection example for relay output (passive) Automation system with relay input (e.g. PLC) Power supply Transmitter: observe input values → 186 Current input 1 2 3 4 A0028915 26 1 2 3 4 60 Connection example for 4 to 20 mA current input Power supply Terminal box External measuring device (to read in pressure or temperature, for instance) Transmitter Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection Status input 1 2 3 A0028764 27 1 2 3 Connection example for status input Automation system with status output (e.g. PLC) Power supply Transmitter 7.7 Hardware settings 7.7.1 Setting the device address The device address must always be configured for a Modbus slave. The valid device addresses are in the range from 1 to 247. Each address may only be assigned once in a Modbus RS485 network. If an address is not configured correctly, the measuring device is not recognized by the Modbus master. All measuring devices are delivered from the factory with the device address 247 and with the "software addressing" address mode. Endress+Hauser 61 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Proline 500 – digital transmitter Hardware addressing r Po I/O I/O I/O we 2 3 4 ES C + Po we r op en pres s ES - E C + - op en pres s 3. 2. 1. I/O 3 I/O 3 I/O 2 P ow er 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 4. Modbus address 1 Off 2 3 4 5. On A0029677 1. Open the housing cover. 2. Remove the display module. 3. Fold open the terminal cover. 4. Set the desired device address using the DIP switches. 5. To switch addressing from software addressing to hardware addressing: set the DIP switch to On. The change of device address takes effect after 10 seconds. Software addressing ‣ To switch addressing from hardware addressing to software addressing: set the DIP switch to Off. The device address configured in the Device address parameter takes effect after 10 seconds. 62 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection Proline 500 transmitter Hardware addressing 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Modbus address 1. A0029634 Set the desired device address using the DIP switches in the connection compartment. 2. Off On 1 2 3 4 A0029633 To switch addressing from software addressing to hardware addressing: set the DIP switch to On. The change of device address takes effect after 10 seconds. Software addressing ‣ To switch addressing from hardware addressing to software addressing: set the DIP switch to Off. The device address configured in the Device address parameter takes effect after 10 seconds. 7.7.2 Activating the terminating resistor To avoid incorrect communication transmission caused by impedance mismatch, terminate the Modbus RS485 cable correctly at the start and end of the bus segment. Endress+Hauser 63 Electrical connection Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Proline 500 – digital transmitter r Po I/O I/O I/O we 2 3 4 ES C + Po we r op en pres s ES - E C + - op en pres s 3. 2. I/O 2 ow P er 1. 2 3 4 I/O 3 I/O 3 1 OFF 4. ON A0029675 1. Open the housing cover. 2. Remove the display module. 3. Fold open the terminal cover. 4. Switch DIP switch no. 3 to On. Proline 500 transmitter ‣ Off On 1 2 3 4 A0029632 Switch DIP switch no. 3 to On. 7.8 Ensuring the degree of protection The measuring instrument fulfills all the requirements for the degree of protection IP66/67, Type 4X enclosure. To guarantee the degree of protection IP66/67, Type 4X enclosure, carry out the following steps after the electrical connection: 64 1. Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly. 2. Dry, clean or replace the seals if necessary. 3. Tighten all housing screws and screw covers. 4. Firmly tighten the cable glands. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Electrical connection 5. To ensure that moisture does not enter the cable entry: Route the cable so that it loops down before the cable entry ("water trap"). 6. The cable glands supplied do not ensure housing protection when not in use. They must therefore be replaced by dummy plugs corresponding to the housing protection. A0029278 7.9 Endress+Hauser Post-connection check Are cables or the device undamaged (visual inspection)? Is the protective earthing established correctly? Do the cables used comply with the requirements ? Are the mounted cables relieved of tension? Are all cable glands installed, securely tightened and leak-tight? Cable run with "water trap" → 64? Is the terminal assignment correct ? Is the potential equalization established correctly ? Are dummy plugs inserted in unused cable entries and have transportation plugs been replaced with dummy plugs? 65 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 8 Operation options 8.1 Overview of operation options ESC - + 1 E 2 3 4 A0030213 1 2 3 4 66 Local operation via display module Computer with web browser or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM) Mobile handheld terminal with SmartBlue app Automation system (e.g. PLC) Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Operation options 8.2 Structure and function of the operating menu 8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu For an overview of the operating menu for experts: see the "Description of Device Parameters" document supplied with the device → 208 Operating menu for operators and maintenances Language Operatation ! Language Operator Parameter 1 Parameter n Submenu 1 Submenu n Setup Device tag Wizard n / Parameter n Advanced setup Enter access code Parameter 1 Task-oriented Maintenance Wizard 1 / Parameter 1 Parameter n Submenu 1 Submenu n Diagnostics Parameter 1 Parameter n Submenu 1 Submenu n Operating menu for experts Expert Access status display Parameter n Sensor Input Output Communication Function-oriented Expert System Application Diagnostics A0018237-EN 28 Endress+Hauser Schematic structure of the operating menu 67 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 8.2.2 Operating philosophy The individual parts of the operating menu are assigned to certain user roles (e.g. operator, maintenance etc.). Each user role contains typical tasks within the device life cycle. Menu/parameter Language Taskoriented Operation Setup User role and tasks Content/meaning Role "Operator", "Maintenance" Tasks during operation: • Configuration of the operational display • Reading measured values • Defining the operating language • Defining the Web server operating language • Resetting and controlling totalizers "Maintenance" role Commissioning: • Configuration of the measurement • Configuration of the inputs and outputs • Configuration of the communication interface Wizards for fast commissioning: • Configuring the system units • Displaying the I/O configuration • Configuring the inputs • Configuring the outputs • Configuration of the operational display • Configuring the low flow cut off • Configuring empty pipe detection • Configuration of the operational display (e.g. display format, display contrast) • Resetting and controlling totalizers Advanced setup • For more customized configuration of the measurement (adaptation to special measuring conditions) • Configuration of totalizers • Configuration of electrode cleaning (optional) • Configuration of WLAN settings • Administration (define access code, reset measuring device) Diagnostics Expert 68 Functionoriented "Maintenance" role Troubleshooting: • Diagnostics and elimination of process and device errors • Measured value simulation Contains all parameters for error detection and analyzing process and device errors: • Diagnostic list Contains up to 5 currently pending diagnostic messages. • Event logbook Contains event messages that have occurred. • Device information Contains information for identifying the device • Measured values Contains all current measured values. • Data logging submenu with the "Extended HistoROM" order option Storage and visualization of measured values • Heartbeat Technology Verification of device functionality on request and documentation of verification results • Simulation Used to simulate measured values or output values. Tasks that require detailed knowledge of the function of the device: • Commissioning measurements under difficult conditions • Optimal adaptation of the measurement to difficult conditions • Detailed configuration of the communication interface • Error diagnostics in difficult cases Contains all of the device parameters and allows direct access to these by means of an access code. The structure of this menu is based on the function blocks of the device: • System Contains all higher-level device parameters that do not affect measurement or measured value communication • Sensor Configuration of the measurement. • Input Configuration of the status input • Output Configuration of the analog current outputs as well as the pulse/frequency and switch output • Communication Configuration of the digital communication interface and the Web server • Application Configuration of the functions that go beyond the actual measurement (e.g. totalizer) • Diagnostics Error detection and analysis of process and device errors and for device simulation and Heartbeat Technology. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Operation options 8.3 Access to operating menu via local display 8.3.1 Operational display 1 2 F XXXXXXXXX 4 3 1120.50 l/h 5 A0029346 1 2 3 4 5 Operational display Device tag → 100 Status area Display range for measured values (up to 4 lines) Operating elements → 75 Status area The following symbols appear in the status area of the operational display at the top right: • Status signals→ 156 • F: Failure • C: Function check • S: Out of specification • M: Maintenance required • Diagnostic behavior→ 157 • : Alarm • : Warning • : Locking (the device is locked via the hardware ) • : Communication (communication via remote operation is active) Display area In the display area, each measured value is prefaced by certain symbol types for further description: Measured variable Measurement channel number Diagnostic behavior ↓ ↓ ↓ Example Appears only if a diagnostics event is present for this measured variable. Endress+Hauser 69 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Measured variables Symbol Meaning Conductivity Mass flow The number and display format of the measured variables can be configured via the Format display parameter (→ 116). Totalizer Symbol Meaning Totalizer The measurement channel number indicates which of the three totalizers is displayed. Output Symbol Meaning Output The measurement channel number indicates which of the outputs is displayed. Input Symbol Meaning Status input Measurement channel numbers Symbol Meaning Measurement channel 1 to 4 The measurement channel number is displayed only if more than one channel is present for the same measured variable type (e.g. totalizer 1 to 3). Diagnostic behavior Symbol Meaning Alarm • Measurement is interrupted. • Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition. • A diagnostic message is generated. Warning • Measurement is resumed. • The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. • A diagnostic message is generated. The diagnostic behavior pertains to a diagnostic event that is relevant to the displayed measured variable. 70 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 8.3.2 2 Operation options Navigation view In the submenu In the wizard 1 1 0091-1 /../Operation Access stat.disp 3 /../Curr. output 1 S Assign curr. Volume flow 2 Operator Locking status Display 4 4 5 5 A0013993-EN 1 2 3 4 5 3 A0016327-EN Navigation view Navigation path to current position Status area Display area for navigation Operating elements → 75 Navigation path The navigation path to the current position is displayed at the top left in the navigation view and consists of the following elements: • The display symbol for the menu/submenu ( ) or the wizard ( ). • An omission symbol (/ ../) for operating menu levels in between. • Name of the current submenu, wizard or parameter Display symbol Omission symbol Parameter ↓ ↓ ↓ / ../ Indication Example For more information about the icons in the menu, refer to the "Display area" section → 71 Status area The following appears in the status area of the navigation view in the top right corner: • In the submenu • The direct access code to the parameter (e.g., 0022-1) • If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal • In the wizard If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal • For information on the diagnostic behavior and status signal → 156 • For information on the function and entry of the direct access code → 77 Display area Menus Symbol Meaning Operation Is displayed: • In the menu next to the "Operation" selection • At the left in the navigation path in the Operation menu Endress+Hauser 71 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Setup Is displayed: • In the menu next to the "Setup" selection • At the left in the navigation path in the Setup menu Diagnosis Is displayed: • In the menu next to the "Diagnostics" selection • At the left in the navigation path in the Diagnostics menu Expert Is displayed: • In the menu next to the "Expert" selection • At the left in the navigation path in the Expert menu Submenus, wizards, parameters Symbol Meaning Submenu Wizards Parameters within a wizard No display symbol exists for parameters in submenus. Locking procedure Symbol Meaning Parameter locked When displayed in front of a parameter name, indicates that the parameter is locked. • By a user-specific access code • By the hardware write protection switch Wizards Symbol Meaning Switches to the previous parameter. Confirms the parameter value and switches to the next parameter. Opens the editing view of the parameter. 72 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 8.3.3 Operation options Editing view Numeric editor 1 0 5 + 2 1 6 – +0.000 Xx 2 3 8 7 4 9 3 4 A0034250 29 1 2 3 4 For entering values in parameters (e.g. limit values) Entry display area Input screen Confirm, delete or reject entry Operating elements Text editor 1 2 Xxxxxxx A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 6 7 3 5 4 A0034114 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 For entering text in parameters (e.g. device tag) Entry display area Current input screen Change input screen Operating elements Move entry position Delete entry Reject or confirm entry Using the operating elements in the editing view Operating key Meaning Minus key Move the entry position to the left. Plus key Move the entry position to the right. Endress+Hauser 73 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Operating key Meaning Enter key • Pressing the key briefly confirms your selection. • Pressing the key for 2 s confirms your entry. + Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously) Close the editing view without accepting a change. Input screens Symbol Meaning Upper case Lower case Numbers Punctuation marks and special characters: = + – * / ² ³ ¼ ½ ¾ ( ) [ ] < > { } Punctuation marks and special characters: ' " `^. , ; : ? ! % µ ° € $ £ ¥ § @ # / \ I ~ & _ Umlauts and accents Controlling data entries Symbol Meaning Move entry position Reject entry Confirm entry Delete character immediately to the left of the entry position Delete character immediately to the right of the entry position Clear all the characters entered 74 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Operation options 8.3.4 Operating elements Operating key Meaning Minus key In menu, submenu Moves the selection bar upwards in a picklist In wizards Goes to previous parameter In the text and numeric editor Move the entry position to the left. Plus key In menu, submenu Moves the selection bar downwards in a picklist In wizards Goes to the next parameter In the text and numeric editor Move the entry position to the right. Enter key In the operational display Pressing the key briefly opens the operating menu. In menu, submenu • Pressing the key briefly: • Opens the selected menu, submenu or parameter. • Starts the wizard. • If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter. • Pressing the key for 2 s in a parameter: If present, opens the help text for the function of the parameter. In wizards Opens the editing view of the parameter and confirms the parameter value In the text and numeric editor • Pressing the key briefly confirms your selection. • Pressing the key for 2 s confirms your entry. Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously) In menu, submenu • Pressing the key briefly: • Exits the current menu level and takes you to the next higher level. • If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter. • Pressing the key for 2 s returns you to the operational display ("home position"). + In wizards Exits the wizard and takes you to the next higher level In the text and numeric editor Exits the Editing view without applying the changes. Minus/Enter key combination (press and hold down the keys simultaneously) • If keypad lock is active: Pressing the key for 3 s deactivates the keypad lock. • If keypad lock is not active: Pressing the key for 3 s opens the context menu including the option for activating the keypad lock. + 8.3.5 Opening the context menu Using the context menu, the user can call up the following menus quickly and directly from the operational display: • Setup • Data backup • Simulation Endress+Hauser 75 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Calling up and closing the context menu The user is in the operational display. 1. Press the and keys for longer than 3 seconds. The context menu opens. XXXXXXXXXX Setup Conf.backup Simulation Keylock on A0034608-EN 2. Press + simultaneously. The context menu is closed and the operational display appears. Calling up the menu via the context menu 76 1. Open the context menu. 2. Press to navigate to the desired menu. 3. Press to confirm the selection. The selected menu opens. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 8.3.6 Operation options Navigating and selecting from list Different operating elements are used to navigate through the operating menu. The navigation path is displayed on the left in the header. Icons are displayed in front of the individual menus. These icons are also shown in the header during navigation. For an explanation of the navigation view with symbols and operating elements → 71 Example: Setting the number of displayed measured values to "2 values" XXXXXXXXX 20.50 1. 0104-1 Main menu Language English Display/operat. Setup 2. Main menu Language Display/operat. Setup / ../Display/operat. 0091-1 Access stat.disp 3. Operator Locking status Display / ../Display/operat. Locking status Display 4. / ../Display 0098-1 Format display 1 value, max. Contrast display Display intervall 5. / ../Format display 1 value, max. Bargr. + 1 value 2 values Val. large+2val. 6. 0098-1 / ../Format display 1 value, max. Bargr. + 1 value 2 values Val. large+2val. 7. 0098-1 XXXXXXXXX 8. 2s 10.50 mA 2800 Hz A0029562-EN 8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly A parameter number is assigned to every parameter to be able to access a parameter directly via the onsite display. Entering this access code in the Direct access parameter calls up the desired parameter directly. Navigation path Expert → Direct access Endress+Hauser 77 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 The direct access code consists of a 5-digit number (at maximum) and the channel number, which identifies the channel of a process variable: e.g. 00914-2. In the navigation view, this appears on the right-hand side in the header of the selected parameter. 00914-2 1 A0029414 1 Direct access code Note the following when entering the direct access code: • The leading zeros in the direct access code do not have to be entered. Example: Enter "914" instead of "00914" • If no channel number is entered, channel 1 is opened automatically. Example: Enter 00914 → Assign process variable parameter • If a different channel is opened: Enter the direct access code with the corresponding channel number. Example: Enter 00914-2 → Assign process variable parameter For the direct access codes of the individual parameters, see the "Description of Device Parameters" document for the device 8.3.8 Calling up help text Help text is available for some parameters and can be called up from the navigation view. The help text provides a brief explanation of the parameter function and thereby supports swift and safe commissioning. Calling up and closing the help text The user is in the navigation view and the selection bar is on a parameter. 1. Press for 2 s. The help text for the selected parameter opens. Ent. access code Enter access code to disable write protec. A0014002-EN 31 2. Example: Help text for parameter "Enter access code" Press + simultaneously. The help text is closed. 8.3.9 Changing the parameters Parameters can be changed via the numeric editor or text editor. • Numeric editor: Change values in a parameter, e.g. specifications for limit values. • Text editor: Enter text in a parameter, e.g. tag name. A message is displayed if the value entered is outside the permitted value range. 78 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Operation options Ent. access code Invalid or out of range input value Min:0 Max:9999 A0014049-EN For a description of the editing view - consisting of the text editor and numeric editor - with symbols → 73, for a description of the operating elements → 75 8.3.10 User roles and related access authorization The two user roles "Operator" and "Maintenance" have different write access to the parameters if the customer defines a user-specific access code. This protects the device configuration via the local display from unauthorized access → 139. Defining access authorization for user roles An access code is not yet defined when the device is delivered from the factory. Access authorization (read and write access) to the device is not restricted and corresponds to the "Maintenance" user role. ‣ Define the access code. The "Operator" user role is redefined in addition to the "Maintenance" user role. Access authorization differs for the two user roles. Access authorization to parameters: "Maintenance" user role Access code status Read access Write access An access code has not yet been defined (factory setting). After an access code has been defined. 1) 1) The user only has write access after entering the access code. Access authorization to parameters: "Operator" user role Access code status After an access code has been defined. 1) Read access Write access – 1) Despite the defined access code, certain parameters can always be modified and thus are excluded from the write protection as they do not affect the measurement: write protection via access code → 139 The user role with which the user is currently logged on is indicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access status 8.3.11 Disabling write protection via access code If the -symbol appears on the local display in front of a parameter, the parameter is write-protected by a user-specific access code and its value cannot be changed at the moment using local operation → 139. Parameter write protection via local operation can be disabled by entering the user-specific access code in the Enter access code parameter (→ 126) via the respective access option. 1. Endress+Hauser After you press , the input prompt for the access code appears. 79 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 2. Enter the access code. The -symbol in front of the parameters disappears; all previously writeprotected parameters are now re-enabled. 8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypad lock The keypad lock makes it possible to block access to the entire operating menu via local operation. As a result, it is no longer possible to navigate through the operating menu or change the values of individual parameters. Users can only read the measured values on the operational display. The keypad lock is switched on and off via the context menu. Switching on the keypad lock The keypad lock is switched on automatically: • If the device has not been operated via the display for > 1 minute. • Each time the device is restarted. To activate the keylock manually: 1. The device is in the measured value display. Press the and keys for 3 seconds. A context menu appears. 2. In the context menu select the Keylock on option. The keypad lock is switched on. If the user attempts to access the operating menu while the keypad lock is active, the Keylock on message appears. Switching off the keypad lock ‣ The keypad lock is switched on. Press the and keys for 3 seconds. The keypad lock is switched off. 8.4 Access to operating menu via web browser 8.4.1 Function range With the integrated web server, the device can be operated and configured via a web browser service interface (CDI-RJ45) or WLAN interface. The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values, status information on the device is displayed and can be used to monitor device health. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters can be configured. A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication by computer or a mobile handheld terminal. For additional information on the web server, see the Special Documentation for the device. 80 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 8.4.2 Operation options Requirements Computer hardware Hardware Interface CDI-RJ45 WLAN Interface The computer must have a RJ45 interface. 1) The operating unit must have a WLAN interface. Connection Standard Ethernet cable Connection via Wireless LAN. Screen Recommended size: ≥12" (depends on the screen resolution) 1) Recommended cable: CAT5e, CAT6 or CAT7, with shielded plug (e.g. YAMAICHI product; part no. YConProfixPlug63/Prod. ID: 82-006660) Computer software Software Interface CDI-RJ45 Recommended operating systems WLAN • Microsoft Windows 8 or higher. • Mobile operating systems: • iOS • Android Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 7 is supported. Web browsers supported • Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher • Microsoft Edge • Mozilla Firefox • Google Chrome • Safari Computer settings Settings Interface CDI-RJ45 WLAN User rights Appropriate user rights (e.g. administrator rights) for TCP/IP and proxy server settings are necessary (e.g. for adjusting the IP address, subnet mask etc.). Proxy server settings of the web browser The web browser setting Use a proxy server for your LAN must be disabled . JavaScript JavaScript must be enabled. JavaScript must be enabled. WLAN display The requires JavaScript If JavaScript cannot be enabled: Enter http://192.168.1.212/servlet/ basic.html in the address bar of the web browser. A fully functional but simplified version of the operating menu structure starts in the web browser. support. installing a new firmware version: When To enable correct data display, clear the temporary memory (cache) under Internet options in the web browser. Network connections Only use the active network connections to the measuring device. Switch off all other network connections such as WLAN for example. Switch off all other network connections. In the event of connection problems: → 152 Endress+Hauser 81 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Measuring device: Via CDI-RJ45 service interface Device CDI-RJ45 service interface Measuring device The measuring device has an RJ45 interface. Web server Web server must be enabled; factory setting: ON For information on enabling the Web server → 86 Measuring device: via WLAN interface Device WLAN interface Measuring device The measuring device has a WLAN antenna: • Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna • Transmitter with external WLAN antenna Web server Web server and WLAN must be enabled; factory setting: ON For information on enabling the Web server → 86 8.4.3 Connecting the device Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) Preparing the measuring device Proline 500 – digital 1. Loosen the 4 fixing screws on the housing cover. 2. Open the housing cover. 3. The location of the connection socket depends on the measuring device and the communication protocol. Connect the computer to the RJ45 plug via the standard Ethernet cable . Proline 500 1. Depending on the housing version: Loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the housing cover. 2. Depending on the housing version: Unscrew or open the housing cover. 3. Connect the computer to the RJ45 plug via the standard Ethernet connecting cable.. Configuring the Internet protocol of the computer The following information refers to the default Ethernet settings of the device. IP address of the device: 192.168.1.212 (factory setting) 82 1. Switch on the measuring device. 2. Connect the computer to the RJ45 plug via the standard Ethernet cable → 87. 3. If a 2nd network card is not used, close all the applications on the notebook. Applications requiring Internet or a network, such as e-mail, SAP applications, Internet or Windows Explorer. 4. Close any open Internet browsers. 5. Configure the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) as defined in the table: Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Operation options IP address 192.168.1.XXX; for XXX all numerical sequences except: 0, 212 and 255 → e.g. 192.168.1.213 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 Default gateway 192.168.1.212 or leave cells empty Via WLAN interface Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal NOTICE If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost. ‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device. NOTICE Note the following to avoid a network conflict: ‣ Avoid accessing the measuring device simultaneously from the same mobile terminal via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface. ‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 or WLAN interface). ‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g. 192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface). Preparing the mobile terminal ‣ Enable WLAN on the mobile terminal. Establishing a WLAN connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device 1. In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal: Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_500_A802000). 2. If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method. 3. Enter the password: Serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g. L100A802000). The LED on the display module flashes. It is now possible to operate the measuring device with the web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare. The serial number can be found on the nameplate. To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as the WLAN network. Terminating the WLAN connection ‣ After configuring the device: Terminate the WLAN connection between the mobile terminal and measuring device. Starting the web browser 1. Endress+Hauser Start the web browser on the computer. 83 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 2. Enter the IP address of the web server in the address line of the web browser: 192.168.1.212 The login page appears. 2 3 4 1 5 Device name: Device tag: Signal Status: Web server language i English 6 Maintenance 7 Login Access Status Enter access code 8 i Login Reset access code 9 10 A0053670 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Picture of device Device name Device tag Status signal Current measured values Operating language User role Access code Login Reset access code (→ 136) If a login page does not appear, or if the page is incomplete → 152 8.4.4 Logging on 1. Select the preferred operating language for the Web browser. 2. Enter the user-specific access code. 3. Press OK to confirm your entry. Access code 0000 (factory setting); can be changed by customer If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to the login page. 84 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 8.4.5 Operation options User interface 1 2 3 A0029418 1 2 3 Function row Local display language Navigation area Header The following information appears in the header: • Device name • Device tag • Device status with status signal → 159 • Current measured values Function row Functions Meaning Measured values Displays the measured values of the device Menu • Access to the operating menu from the measuring device • The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display information on the operating menu structure: Description of Device Detailed Parameters Device status Displays the diagnostic messages currently pending, listed in order of priority Data management Data exchange between computer and measuring device: • Device configuration: • Load settings from the device (XML format, save configuration) • Save settings to the device (XML format, restore configuration) • Logbook - Export Event logbook (.csv file) • Documents - Export documents: • Export backup data record (.csv file, create documentation of the measuring point configuration) • Verification report (PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat Verification" application package) • Firmware update - Flashing a firmware version Network Configuration and checking of all the parameters required for establishing the connection to the measuring device: • Network settings (e.g. IP address, MAC address) • Device information (e.g. serial number, firmware version) Logout End the operation and call up the login page Navigation area The menus, the associated submenus and parameters can be selected in the navigation area. Endress+Hauser 85 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Working area Depending on the selected function and the related submenus, various actions can be performed in this area: • Configuring parameters • Reading measured values • Calling up help text • Starting an upload/download 8.4.6 Disabling the Web server The Web server of the measuring device can be switched on and off as required using the Web server functionality parameter. Navigation "Expert" menu → Communication → Web server Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Web server functionality Description Switch the Web server on and off. Selection • Off • HTML Off • On Factory setting On Function scope of the "Web server functionality" parameter Option Description Off • The Web server is completely disabled. • Port 80 is locked. HTML Off The HTML version of the Web server is not available. On • The complete Web server functionality is available. • JavaScript is used. • The password is transferred in an encrypted state. • Any change to the password is also transferred in an encrypted state. Enabling the Web server If the Web server is disabled it can only be re-enabled with the Web server functionality parameter via the following operating options: • Via local display • Via Bedientool "FieldCare" • Via "DeviceCare" operating tool 8.4.7 Logging out Before logging out, perform a data backup via the Data management function (upload configuration from device) if necessary. 86 1. Select the Logout entry in the function row. The home page with the Login box appears. 2. Close the Web browser. 3. If no longer needed: Reset the modified properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) → 82. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 8.5 Operation options Access to the operating menu via the operating tool The structure of the operating menu in the operating tools is the same as for operation via the local display. 8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool Via Modbus RS485 protocol This communication interface is available in device versions with a Modbus RS485 output. 3 1 2 A0029437 32 1 2 3 Options for remote operation via Modbus RS485 protocol (active) Control system (e.g. PLC) Computer with web browser (e.g. Microsoft Edge) to access the integrated device web server or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP" or Modbus DTM Transmitter Service interface Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) A point-to-point connection can be established to configure the device onsite. With the housing open, the connection is established directly via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the device. An adapter for the RJ45 to the M12 plug is optionally available for the non-hazardous area: Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)" The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 plug mounted in the cable entry. The connection to the service interface can be established via an M12 plug without opening the device. Endress+Hauser 87 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Proline 500 – digital transmitter 1 open press 3 2 A0029163 33 1 2 3 Connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45) Computer with web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated web server or with "FieldCare" operating tool, "DeviceCare" with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP" or Modbus DTM Standard Ethernet connecting cable with RJ45 plug Service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the measuring device with access to the integrated Web server Proline 500 transmitter 1 3 2 A0027563 34 1 2 3 Connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45) Computer with web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated web server or with "FieldCare" operating tool, "DeviceCare" with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP" or Modbus DTM Standard Ethernet connecting cable with RJ45 plug Service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the measuring device with access to the integrated Web server Via WLAN interface The optional WLAN interface is available on the following device version: Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch control + WLAN" 88 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 3 Operation options 4 3 4 1 1 2 2 5 6 3 3 4 4 7 A0034569 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna Transmitter with external WLAN antenna LED lit constantly: WLAN reception is enabled on measuring device LED flashing: WLAN connection established between operating unit and measuring device Computer with WLAN interface and web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated device web server or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) Mobile handheld terminal with WLAN interface and web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated device web server or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) Smart phone or tablet (e.g. Field Xpert SMT70) Function WLAN: IEEE 802.11 b/g (2.4 GHz) Encryption WPA2-PSK AES-128 (in accordance with IEEE 802.11i) Configurable WLAN channels 1 to 11 Degree of protection IP67 Available antennas • Internal antenna • External antenna (optional) In the event of poor transmission/reception conditions at the place of installation. Only 1 antenna is active at any one time! Range • Internal antenna: typically 10 m (32 ft) • External antenna: typically 50 m (164 ft) Materials (external antenna) • Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylonitrile styrene acrylate) and nickel-plated brass • Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass • Cable: Polyethylene • Plug: Nickel-plated brass • Angle bracket: Stainless steel Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal NOTICE If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost. ‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device. Endress+Hauser 89 Operation options Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 NOTICE Note the following to avoid a network conflict: ‣ Avoid accessing the measuring device simultaneously from the same mobile terminal via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface. ‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 or WLAN interface). ‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g. 192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface). Preparing the mobile terminal ‣ Enable WLAN on the mobile terminal. Establishing a WLAN connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device 1. In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal: Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_500_A802000). 2. If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method. 3. Enter the password: Serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g. L100A802000). The LED on the display module flashes. It is now possible to operate the measuring device with the web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare. The serial number can be found on the nameplate. To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as the WLAN network. Terminating the WLAN connection ‣ After configuring the device: Terminate the WLAN connection between the mobile terminal and measuring device. 8.5.2 FieldCare Function range FDT-based (Field Device Technology) plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser. It can configure all smart field units in a system and helps you manage them. By using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition. Access is via: • CDI-RJ45 service interface → 87 • WLAN interface → 88 Typical functions: • Transmitter parameter configuration • Loading and saving of device data (upload/download) • Documentation of the measuring point • Visualization of the measured value memory (line recorder) and event logbook • Operating Instructions BA00027S • Operating Instructions BA00059S Source for device description files → 92 90 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Operation options Establishing a connection • Operating Instructions BA00027S • Operating Instructions BA00059S User interface 2 4 3 6 5 7 Xxxxxx/…/…/ 1 Device name: Xxxxxxx Mass flow: 12.34 kg/h Device tag: Xxxxxxx Volume flow: 12.34 m³/h Status: Good Xxxxxx Access status tooling + Operation P – Setup Device tag – System units P Mass flow unit P Volume flow unit + Select medium P 8 + … + … + Maintenance Mass flow unit: kg/h Volume flow unit: m³/h Xxxxxx kg/h m³/h 9 Advanced setup + Diagnostics + Expert 10 11 A0021051-EN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Header Picture of device Device name Device tag Status area with status signal → 159 Display area for current measured values Editing toolbar with additional functions such as save/load, event list and create documentation Navigation area with operating menu structure Work area Action area Status area 8.5.3 DeviceCare Function range Tool for connecting and configuring Endress+Hauser field devices. The fastest way to configure Endress+Hauser field devices is with the dedicated "DeviceCare" tool. Together with the device type managers (DTMs) it presents a convenient, comprehensive solution. Innovation brochure IN01047S Source for device description files → 92 Endress+Hauser 91 System integration Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 9 System integration 9.1 Overview of device description files 9.1.1 Current version data for the device Firmware version 01.06.zz • On the title page of the manual • On the transmitter nameplate • Firmware version Diagnostics → Device information → Firmware version Release date of firmware version 08.2022 --- For an overview of the various firmware versions for the device → 171 9.1.2 Operating tools The suitable device description file for the individual operating tools is listed in the table below, along with information on where the file can be acquired. Operating tool via service interface (CDI) or Modbus interface Sources for obtaining device descriptions FieldCare • www.endress.com → Downloads area • USB stick (contact Endress+Hauser) • DVD (contact Endress+Hauser) DeviceCare • www.endress.com → Downloads area • CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser) • DVD (contact Endress+Hauser) 9.2 Compatibility with previous model If the device is replaced, the measuring device Promag 500 supports the compatibility of the Modbus registers for the process variables and the diagnostic information with the previous model Promag 53. It is not necessary to change the engineering parameters in the automation system. Compatible Modbus registers: process variables 92 Process variable Compatible Modbus registers Mass flow 2007 Volume flow 2009 Totalizer 1 2610 Totalizer 2 2810 Totalizer 3 3010 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 System integration Compatible Modbus registers: diagnostic information Diagnostic information Compatible Modbus registers Diagnostic code (data type: String), e.g. F270 6821 Diagnostic number (data type: Integer), e.g. 270 6859 The Modbus registers are compatible but the diagnostic numbers are not. Overview of the new diagnostic numbers → 162. 9.3 Modbus RS485 information 9.3.1 Function codes Function codes are used to define which read or write action is carried out via the Modbus protocol. The measuring device supports the following function codes: Code 03 Name Read holding register Description Application Master reads one or more Modbus registers from the device. A maximum of 125 consecutive registers can be read with 1 telegram: 1 register = 2 bytes Read device parameters with read and write access Example: Read volume flow measuring device does The not make a distinction between function codes 03 and 04; these codes therefore yield the same result. 04 Read input register Master reads one or more Modbus registers from the device. A maximum of 125 consecutive registers can be read with 1 telegram: 1 register = 2 bytes Read device parameters with read access Example: Read totalizer value measuring device does The not make a distinction between function codes 03 and 04; these codes therefore yield the same result. 06 Write single registers Master writes a new value to one Modbus register of the measuring device. Write only 1 device parameter Example: reset totalizer function code 16 to write Use multiple registers with just 1 telegram. 08 Diagnostics Master checks the communication connection to the measuring device. The following "Diagnostics codes" are supported: • Sub-function 00 = Return query data (loopback test) • Sub-function 02 = Return diagnostics register Endress+Hauser 93 System integration Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Code 16 Name Description Write multiple registers Application Master writes a new value to multiple Modbus registers of the device. A maximum of 120 consecutive registers can be written with 1 telegram. Write multiple device parameters the required device Ifparameters are not available as a group, yet must nevertheless be addressed with a single telegram, use Modbus data map → 95 23 Read/Write multiple registers Master reads and writes a maximum of 118 Modbus registers of the measuring device simultaneously with 1 telegram. Write access is executed before read access. Write and read multiple device parameters Example: • Read mass flow • Reset totalizer Broadcast messages are only allowed with function codes 06, 16 and 23. 9.3.2 Register information For an overview of device parameters with their respective Modbus register information, please refer to the "Modbus RS485 register information" section in the "Description of device parameters" documentation → 208. 9.3.3 Response time Response time of the measuring device to the request telegram of the Modbus master: typically 3 to 5 ms 9.3.4 Data types The measuring device supports the following data types: FLOAT (floating point number IEEE 754) Data length = 4 bytes (2 registers) Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 0 SEEEEEEE EMMMMMMM MMMMMMMM MMMMMMMM S = sign, E = exponent, M = mantissa INTEGER Data length = 2 bytes (1 register) Byte 1 Byte 0 Most significant byte (MSB) Least significant byte (LSB) STRING Data length = depends on the device parameter, e.g. presentation of a device parameter with a data length = 18 bytes (9 registers) Byte 17 Most significant byte (MSB) 94 Byte 16 ... ... Byte 1 Byte 0 Least significant byte (LSB) Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 9.3.5 System integration Byte transmission sequence Byte addressing, i.e. the transmission sequence of the bytes, is not specified in the Modbus specification. For this reason, it is important to coordinate or match the addressing method between the master and slave during commissioning. This can be configured in the measuring device using the Byte order parameter. The bytes are transmitted depending on the selection in the Byte order parameter: FLOAT Sequence Options 1. 2. 3. 4. 1–0–3–2* Byte 1 (MMMMMMMM) Byte 0 (MMMMMMMM) Byte 3 (SEEEEEEE) Byte 2 (EMMMMMMM) 0–1–2–3 Byte 0 (MMMMMMMM) Byte 1 (MMMMMMMM) Byte 2 (EMMMMMMM) Byte 3 (SEEEEEEE) 2–3–0–1 Byte 2 (EMMMMMMM) Byte 3 (SEEEEEEE) Byte 0 (MMMMMMM) Byte 1 (MMMMMMM) 3–2–1–0 Byte 3 (SEEEEEEE) Byte 2 (EMMMMMMM) Byte 1 (MMMMMMMM) Byte 0 (MMMMMMMM) * = factory setting, S = sign, E = exponent, M = mantissa INTEGER Sequence Options 1. 2. 1–0–3–2* 3–2–1–0 Byte 1 (MSB) Byte 0 (LSB) 0–1–2–3 2–3–0–1 Byte 0 (LSB) Byte 1 (MSB) * = factory setting, MSB = most significant byte, LSB = least significant byte STRING Presentation taking the example of a device parameter with a data length of 18 bytes. Sequence Options 1. 2. ... 17. 18. 1–0–3–2* 3–2–1–0 Byte 17 (MSB) Byte 16 ... Byte 1 Byte 0 (LSB) 0–1–2–3 2–3–0–1 Byte 16 Byte 17 (MSB) ... Byte 0 (LSB) Byte 1 * = factory setting, MSB = most significant byte, LSB = least significant byte 9.3.6 Modbus data map Function of the Modbus data map The measuring instrument offers a special memory area, the Modbus data map (for a maximum of 16 device parameters), to allow users to call up multiple device parameters via Modbus RS485 and not only individual device parameters or a group of consecutive device parameters. Grouping of device parameters is flexible and the Modbus master can read or write to the entire data block simultaneously with a single request telegram. Endress+Hauser 95 System integration Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Structure of the Modbus data map The Modbus data map consists of two data sets: • Scan list: Configuration area The device parameters to be grouped are defined in a list by entering their Modbus RS485 register addresses in the list. • Data area The measuring instrument reads out the register addresses entered in the scan list cyclically and writes the associated device data (values) to the data area. For an overview of device parameters with their respective Modbus register information, please refer to the "Modbus RS485 register information" section in the "Description of device parameters" documentation → 208. Scan list configuration For configuration, the Modbus RS485 register addresses of the device parameters to be grouped must be entered in the scan list. Please note the following basic requirements of the scan list: Max. entries 16 device parameters Supported device parameters Only parameters with the following characteristics are supported: • Access type: read or write access • Data type: float or integer Configuration of the scan list via FieldCare or DeviceCare Carried out using the operating menu of the measuring instrument: Expert → Communication → Modbus data map → Scan list register 0 to 15 Scan list No. Configuration register 0 Scan list register 0 ... ... 15 Scan list register 15 Configuration of the scan list via Modbus RS485 Carried out using register addresses 5001 - 5016 Scan list No. Modbus RS485 register Data type Configuration register 0 5001 Integer Scan list register 0 ... ... Integer ... 15 5016 Integer Scan list register 15 Reading out data via Modbus RS485 The Modbus master accesses the data area of the Modbus data map to read out the current values of the device parameters defined in the scan list. Master access to data area 96 Via register addresses 5051-5081 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 System integration Data area Device parameter value Modbus RS485 register Data type* Access** Start register End register (Float only) Value of scan list register 0 5051 5052 Integer/float read/write Value of scan list register 1 5053 5054 Integer/float read/write Value of scan list register ... ... ... ... ... Value of scan list register 15 5081 5082 Integer/float read/write * Data type depends on the device parameters entered in the scan list. ** Data access depends on the device parameters entered in the scan list. If the device parameter entered supports read and write access, the parameter can also be accessed via the data area. Endress+Hauser 97 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 10 Commissioning 10.1 Post-mounting and post-connection check Before commissioning the device: ‣ Make sure that the post-installation and post-connection checks have been performed successfully. • Checklist for "Post-mounting" check→ 35 • Checklist for "Post-connection check" → 65 10.2 Switching on the measuring device ‣ Switch on the device upon successful completion of the post-mounting and post- connection check. After a successful startup, the local display switches automatically from the startup display to the operational display. If nothing appears on the local display or if a diagnostic message is displayed, refer to the section on "Diagnostics and troubleshooting" → 151. 10.3 Connecting via FieldCare • For connecting FieldCare → 87 • For connecting via FieldCare → 91 • For user interface of FieldCare → 91 10.4 Setting the operating language Factory setting: English or ordered local language XXXXXXXXX 20.50 XX 1. XX Main menu Display language 0104-1 English Operation Setup 2. Display language à English Deutsch Español Français 3. 4. 0104-1 Display language à English Deutsch Español Français Hauptmenü Sprache 0104-1 0104-1 Deutsch Betrieb Setup A0029420 35 98 Taking the example of the local display Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 10.5 Commissioning Configuring the measuring instrument The Setup menu with its guided wizards contains all the parameters needed for standard operation. XXXXXXXXX 20.50 mA Main menu Display language 1. English Display/operat. Setup Main menu Display/operat. Setup 2. Diagnostic / ../Setup Medium selection 3. XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX A0032222-EN 36 Navigation to "Setup" menu using the example of the local display The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version. Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the Operating Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation for the device ("Supplementary documentation"). Navigation "Setup" menu Setup ‣ System units → 100 ‣ Communication → 102 ‣ I/O configuration → 103 ‣ Current input 1 to n → 104 ‣ Status input 1 to n → 105 ‣ Current output 1 to n → 106 ‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output → 109 ‣ Relay output 1 to n → 119 1 to n Endress+Hauser 99 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 10.5.1 ‣ Double pulse output → 121 ‣ Display → 115 ‣ Low flow cut off → 117 ‣ Empty pipe detection → 119 ‣ Configure flow damping → 122 ‣ Advanced setup → 125 Defining the tag name To enable fast identification of the measuring point within the system, you can enter a unique designation using the Device tag parameter and thus change the factory setting. 1 XXXXXXXXX A0029422 37 1 Header of the operational display with tag name Tag name Enter the tag name in the "FieldCare" operating tool → 91 Navigation "Setup" menu → Device tag Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Device tag Description Enter the name for the measuring point. 10.5.2 User entry Max. 32 characters, such as letters, numbers or special characters (e.g. @, %, /). Factory setting Promag Setting the system units In the System units submenu the units of all the measured values can be set. The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version. Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the Operating Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation for the device ("Supplementary documentation"). 100 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning Navigation "Setup" menu → System units ‣ System units Volume flow unit → 101 Volume unit → 101 Conductivity unit → 101 Temperature unit → 101 Mass flow unit → 102 Mass unit → 102 Density unit → 102 Corrected volume flow unit → 102 Corrected volume unit → 102 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Volume flow unit Prerequisite – Description Select volume flow unit. Selection Factory setting Unit choose list Country-specific: • l/h • gal/min (us) Result The selected unit applies to: • Output • Low flow cut off • Simulation process variable Volume unit – Select volume unit. Unit choose list Country-specific: • m³ • gal (us) Conductivity unit The On option is selected in the Conductivity measurement parameter. Select conductivity unit. Unit choose list µS/cm – Select temperature unit. Unit choose list Country-specific: • °C • °F Temperature unit Result The selected unit applies to: Simulation process variable Result The selected unit applies to: • Temperature parameter • Maximum value parameter • Minimum value parameter • External temperature parameter • Maximum value parameter • Minimum value parameter Endress+Hauser 101 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter Mass flow unit Prerequisite – Description Selection Select mass flow unit. Unit choose list Country-specific: • kg/h • lb/min Result The selected unit applies to: • Output • Low flow cut off • Simulation process variable Factory setting Mass unit – Select mass unit. Unit choose list Country-specific: • kg • lb Density unit – Select density unit. Unit choose list Country-specific: • kg/l • lb/ft³ Unit choose list Country-specific: • Nl/h • Sft³/h Unit choose list Country-specific: • Nm³ • Sft³ Result The selected unit applies to: • Output • Simulation process variable Corrected volume flow unit – Select corrected volume flow unit. Result The selected unit applies to: Corrected volume flow parameter (→ 144) Corrected volume unit – Select corrected volume unit. 10.5.3 Configuring the communication interface The Communication submenu guides you systematically through all the parameters that have to be configured for selecting and setting the communication interface. Navigation "Setup" menu → Communication ‣ Communication 102 Bus address → 103 Baudrate → 103 Data transfer mode → 103 Parity → 103 Byte order → 103 Failure mode → 103 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Description User entry / Selection Factory setting Bus address Enter device address. 1 to 247 247 Baudrate Define data transfer speed. • 1200 BAUD • 2400 BAUD • 4800 BAUD • 9600 BAUD • 19200 BAUD • 38400 BAUD • 57600 BAUD • 115200 BAUD 19200 BAUD Data transfer mode Select data transfer mode. • ASCII • RTU RTU Parity Select parity bits. Picklist ASCII option: • 0 = Even option • 1 = Odd option Even Picklist RTU option: • 0 = Even option • 1 = Odd option • 2 = None / 1 stop bit option • 3 = None / 2 stop bits option Byte order Select byte transmission sequence. • 0-1-2-3 • 3-2-1-0 • 1-0-3-2 • 2-3-0-1 Failure mode Select measured value output behavior when • NaN value a diagnostic message occurs via Modbus • Last valid value communication. 1-0-3-2 NaN value NaN 1) 1) Not a Number 10.5.4 Displaying the I/O configuration The I/O configuration submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters in which the configuration of the I/O modules is displayed. Navigation "Setup" menu → I/O configuration ‣ I/O configuration Endress+Hauser I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers → 104 I/O module 1 to n information → 104 I/O module 1 to n type → 104 Apply I/O configuration → 104 I/O alteration code → 104 103 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Description User interface / Selection / User entry Factory setting I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers Shows the terminal numbers used by the I/O • Not used module. • 26-27 (I/O 1) • 24-25 (I/O 2) • 22-23 (I/O 3) • 20-21 (I/O 4) * – I/O module 1 to n information Shows information of the plugged I/O module. • Not plugged • Invalid • Not configurable • Configurable • MODBUS – I/O module 1 to n type Shows the I/O module type. • Off • Current output * • Current input * • Status input * • Pulse/frequency/switch output * • Double pulse output * • Relay output * Off Apply I/O configuration Apply parameterization of the freely configurable I/O module. • No • Yes No I/O alteration code Enter the code in order to change the I/O configuration. Positive integer 0 * Visibility depends on order options or device settings 10.5.5 Configuring the current input The "Current input" wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters that have to be set for configuring the current input. Navigation "Setup" menu → Current input ‣ Current input 1 to n 104 Terminal number → 105 Signal mode → 105 0/4 mA value → 105 20 mA value → 105 Current span → 105 Failure mode → 105 Failure value → 105 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface / Selection / User entry Factory setting Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers used by the current input module. • Not used • 24-25 (I/O 2) • 22-23 (I/O 3) • 20-21 (I/O 4) * – Signal mode The measuring device is not approved for use in the hazardous area with type of protection Ex-i. Select the signal mode for the current input. • Passive • Active * Active 0/4 mA value – Enter 4 mA value. Signed floating-point number 0 20 mA value – Enter 20 mA value. Signed floating-point number Depends on country and nominal diameter Current span – Select current range for process value output and upper/lower level for alarm signal. • 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8 mA) • 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA) Country-specific: • 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8 mA) Failure mode – Define input behavior in alarm condition. • Alarm • Last valid value • Defined value Alarm Failure value In the Failure mode parameter, the Defined value option is selected. Enter value to be used by the device if input value from external device is missing. Signed floating-point number 0 * Visibility depends on order options or device settings 10.5.6 Configuring the status input The Status input submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters that have to be set for configuring the status input. Navigation "Setup" menu → Status input 1 to n ‣ Status input 1 to n Endress+Hauser Assign status input → 106 Terminal number → 106 Active level → 106 Terminal number → 106 Response time status input → 106 Terminal number → 106 105 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Description Selection / User interface / User entry Factory setting Assign status input Select function for the status input. • Off • Reset totalizer 1 • Reset totalizer 2 • Reset totalizer 3 • Reset all totalizers • Flow override Off Terminal number Shows the terminal numbers used by the status input module. • Not used • 24-25 (I/O 2) • 22-23 (I/O 3) • 20-21 (I/O 4) * – Active level Define input signal level at which the assigned function is triggered. • High • Low High Response time status input Define the minimum amount of time the 5 to 200 ms input signal level must be present before the selected function is triggered. * 50 ms Visibility depends on order options or device settings 10.5.7 Configuring the current output The Current output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that have to be set for configuring the current output. Navigation "Setup" menu → Current output ‣ Current output 1 to n 106 Terminal number → 107 Signal mode → 107 Process variable current output → 107 Current range output → 107 Lower range value output → 107 Upper range value output → 107 Fixed current → 107 Damping current output → 108 Failure behavior current output → 108 Failure current → 108 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface / Selection / User entry Factory setting Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers used by the current output module. • Not used • 24-25 (I/O 2) • 22-23 (I/O 3) • 20-21 (I/O 4) * – Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the current output. • Active * • Passive * Active Process variable current output – Select process variable for current output. • Off • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Flow velocity • Conductivity • Corrected conductivity * • Temperature * • Electronics temperature • Noise * • Coil current shot time * • Reference electrode potential against PE * • HBSI * • Build-up index * • Test point 1 • Test point 2 • Test point 3 Volume flow Current range output – Select current range for process value output and upper/lower level for alarm signal. • 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8 mA) • 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA) • 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA) • Fixed value Depends on country: • 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8 mA) Lower range value output In Current span parameter (→ 107), one of the following options is selected: • 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8 mA) • 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA) • 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA) Enter lower range value for the Signed floating-point measured value range. number Depends on country: • 0 l/h • 0 gal/min (us) Upper range value output In Current span parameter (→ 107), one of the following options is selected: • 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8 mA) • 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA) • 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA) Enter upper range value for the measured value range. Signed floating-point number Depends on country and nominal diameter Fixed current The Fixed current option is selected in the Current span parameter (→ 107). Defines the fixed output current. 0 to 22.5 mA 22.5 mA Endress+Hauser 107 Commissioning Parameter Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Prerequisite Description User interface / Selection / User entry Factory setting Damping current output A process variable is selected in the Assign current output parameter (→ 107) and one of the following options is selected in the Current span parameter (→ 107): • 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8 mA) • 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA) • 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA) Set reaction time for output signal to fluctuations in the measured value. 0.0 to 999.9 s 1.0 s Failure behavior current output A process variable is selected in the Assign current output parameter (→ 107) and one of the following options is selected in the Current span parameter (→ 107): • 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8 mA) • 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA) • 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA) Define output behavior in alarm condition. • Min. • Max. • Last valid value • Actual value • Fixed value Max. Failure current The Defined value option is selected in the Failure mode parameter. Enter current output value in alarm condition. 0 to 22.5 mA 22.5 mA * 108 Visibility depends on order options or device settings Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 10.5.8 Commissioning Configuring the pulse/frequency/switch output The Pulse/frequency/switch output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that can be set for configuring the selected output type. Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Pulse/frequency/switch output ‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n → 109 Operating mode Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Operating mode Description Define the output as a pulse, frequency or switch output. Selection • Pulse • Frequency • Switch Factory setting Pulse Configuring the pulse output Navigation "Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output ‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n Endress+Hauser Operating mode → 110 Terminal number → 110 Signal mode → 110 Assign pulse output → 110 Pulse scaling → 110 Pulse width → 110 Failure mode → 110 Invert output signal → 110 109 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User interface / User entry Factory setting Operating mode – Define the output as a pulse, frequency or switch output. • Pulse • Frequency • Switch Pulse Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers used by the PFS output module. • Not used • 24-25 (I/O 2) • 22-23 (I/O 3) • 20-21 (I/O 4) * – Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the PFS output. • Passive • Active * • Passive NE Passive Assign pulse output 1 to n The Pulse option is selected in Operating mode parameter. Select process variable for pulse output. • Off • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow Off Pulse scaling The Pulse option is selected in the Operating mode parameter (→ 109) and a process variable is selected in the Assign pulse output parameter (→ 110). Enter quantity for measured value at which a pulse is output. Positive floating point number Depends on country and nominal diameter Pulse width The Pulse option is selected in the Operating mode parameter (→ 109) and a process variable is selected in the Assign pulse output parameter (→ 110). Define time width of the output pulse. 0.05 to 2 000 ms 100 ms Failure mode The Pulse option is selected in the Operating mode parameter (→ 109) and a process variable is selected in the Assign pulse output parameter (→ 110). Define output behavior in alarm condition. • Actual value • No pulses No pulses Invert output signal – Invert the output signal. • No • Yes No * Visibility depends on order options or device settings Configuring the frequency output Navigation "Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output ‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n 110 Operating mode → 111 Terminal number → 111 Signal mode → 111 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning Assign frequency output → 111 Minimum frequency value → 112 Maximum frequency value → 112 Measuring value at minimum frequency → 112 Measuring value at maximum frequency → 112 Failure mode → 112 Failure frequency → 112 Invert output signal → 112 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User interface / User entry Factory setting Operating mode – Define the output as a pulse, frequency or switch output. • Pulse • Frequency • Switch Pulse Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers used by the PFS output module. • Not used • 24-25 (I/O 2) • 22-23 (I/O 3) • 20-21 (I/O 4) * – Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the PFS output. • Passive • Active * • Passive NE Passive Assign frequency output The Frequency option is selected in Operating mode parameter (→ 109). Select process variable for frequency output. • Off • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Flow velocity • Conductivity * • Corrected conductivity * • Temperature * • Electronics temperature • Noise * • Coil current shot time * • Reference electrode potential against PE * • HBSI * • Build-up index * • Test point 1 • Test point 2 • Test point 3 Off Endress+Hauser 111 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User interface / User entry Factory setting Minimum frequency value The Frequency option is selected in the Operating mode parameter (→ 109) and a process variable is selected in the Assign frequency output parameter (→ 111). Enter minimum frequency. 0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz 0.0 Hz Maximum frequency value The Frequency option is selected in the Operating mode parameter (→ 109) and a process variable is selected in the Assign frequency output parameter (→ 111). Enter maximum frequency. 0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz 10 000.0 Hz Measuring value at minimum frequency The Frequency option is selected in the Operating mode parameter (→ 109) and a process variable is selected in the Assign frequency output parameter (→ 111). Enter measured value for minimum frequency. Signed floating-point number Depends on country and nominal diameter Measuring value at maximum frequency The Frequency option is selected in the Operating mode parameter (→ 109) and a process variable is selected in the Assign frequency output parameter (→ 111). Enter measured value for maximum frequency. Signed floating-point number Depends on country and nominal diameter Failure mode The Frequency option is selected in the Operating mode parameter (→ 109) and a process variable is selected in the Assign frequency output parameter (→ 111). Define output behavior in alarm condition. • Actual value • Defined value • 0 Hz 0 Hz Failure frequency In the Operating mode parameter (→ 109), the Frequency option is selected, in the Assign frequency output parameter (→ 111) a process variable is selected, and in the Failure mode parameter, the Defined value option is selected. Enter frequency output value in alarm condition. 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz Invert output signal – Invert the output signal. • No • Yes No * 112 Visibility depends on order options or device settings Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning Configuring the switch output Navigation "Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output ‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n Operating mode → 113 Terminal number → 113 Signal mode → 113 Switch output function → 114 Assign diagnostic behavior → 114 Assign limit → 114 Assign flow direction check → 114 Assign status → 114 Switch-on value → 114 Switch-off value → 114 Switch-on delay → 114 Switch-off delay → 115 Failure mode → 115 Invert output signal → 115 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User interface / User entry Factory setting Operating mode – Define the output as a pulse, frequency or switch output. • Pulse • Frequency • Switch Pulse Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers used by the PFS output module. • Not used • 24-25 (I/O 2) • 22-23 (I/O 3) • 20-21 (I/O 4) * – Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the PFS output. • Passive • Active * • Passive NE Passive Endress+Hauser 113 Commissioning Parameter Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Prerequisite Description Selection / User interface / User entry Factory setting Switch output function The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter. Select function for switch output. • Off • On • Diagnostic behavior • Limit • Flow direction check • Status Off Assign diagnostic behavior • In the Operating mode parameter, the Switch option is selected. • In the Switch output function parameter, the Diagnostic behavior option is selected. Select diagnostic behavior for switch output. • Alarm • Alarm or warning • Warning Alarm Assign limit • The Switch option is selected in Operating mode parameter. • The Limit option is selected in Switch output function parameter. Select process variable for limit • Off function. • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Flow velocity • Conductivity * • Corrected conductivity * • Totalizer 1 • Totalizer 2 • Totalizer 3 • Temperature * • Electronics temperature Volume flow Assign flow direction check • The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter. • The Flow direction check option is selected in the Switch output function parameter. Select process variable for flow direction monitoring. Volume flow Assign status • The Switch option is selected in Operating mode parameter. • The Status option is selected in Switch output function parameter. Select device status for switch output. • Empty pipe detection • Low flow cut off • Build-up index * • HBSI limit exceeded * Empty pipe detection Switch-on value • The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter. • The Limit option is selected in the Switch output function parameter. Enter measured value for the switch-on point. Signed floating-point number Depends on country: • 0 l/h • 0 gal/min (us) Switch-off value • The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter. • The Limit option is selected in the Switch output function parameter. Enter measured value for the switch-off point. Signed floating-point number Depends on country: • 0 l/h • 0 gal/min (us) Switch-on delay • The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter. • The Limit option is selected in the Switch output function parameter. Define delay for the switch-on of status output. 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s 114 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter Commissioning Prerequisite Description Switch-off delay • The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter. • The Limit option is selected in the Switch output function parameter. Define delay for the switch-off of status output. 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s Failure mode – Define output behavior in alarm condition. • Actual status • Open • Closed Open Invert output signal – Invert the output signal. • No • Yes No * Selection / User interface / User entry Factory setting Visibility depends on order options or device settings 10.5.9 Configuring the local display The Display wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that can configured for configuring the local display. Navigation "Setup" menu → Display ‣ Display Endress+Hauser Format display → 116 Value 1 display → 116 0% bargraph value 1 → 116 100% bargraph value 1 → 116 Value 2 display → 116 Value 3 display → 116 0% bargraph value 3 → 116 100% bargraph value 3 → 116 Value 4 display → 116 115 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry Factory setting Format display A local display is provided. Select how measured values are shown on the display. • 1 value, max. size • 1 bargraph + 1 value • 2 values • 1 value large + 2 values • 4 values 1 value, max. size Value 1 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that is shown on the local display. • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Flow velocity • Corrected conductivity * • Totalizer 1 • Totalizer 2 • Totalizer 3 • Current output 1 * • Current output 2 * • Current output 3 * • Current output 4 * • Temperature * • Electronics temperature • HBSI * • Noise * • Coil current shot time * • Reference electrode potential against PE * • Build-up index * • Test point 1 • Test point 2 • Test point 3 Volume flow 0% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 0% value for bar graph display. Signed floating-point number Country-specific: • 0 l/h • 0 gal/min (us) 100% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 100% value for bar graph display. Signed floating-point number Depends on country and nominal diameter Value 2 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that is shown on the local display. For the picklist, see Value 1 display parameter (→ 116) None Value 3 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that is shown on the local display. For the picklist, see Value 1 display parameter (→ 116) None 0% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Value 3 display parameter. Enter 0% value for bar graph display. Signed floating-point number Country-specific: • 0 l/h • 0 gal/min (us) 100% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Value 3 display parameter. Enter 100% value for bar graph display. Signed floating-point number 0 Value 4 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that is shown on the local display. For the picklist, see Value 1 display parameter (→ 116) None 116 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter Commissioning Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry Factory setting Value 5 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that is shown on the local display. For the picklist, see Value 1 display parameter (→ 116) None Value 6 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that is shown on the local display. For the picklist, see Value 1 display parameter (→ 116) None Value 7 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that is shown on the local display. For the picklist, see Value 1 display parameter (→ 116) None Value 8 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that is shown on the local display. For the picklist, see Value 1 display parameter (→ 116) None * Visibility depends on order options or device settings 10.5.10 Configuring the low flow cut off The Low flow cut off wizard systematically guides the user through all the parameters that must be set to configure low flow cut off. Navigation "Setup" menu → Low flow cut off ‣ Low flow cut off Assign process variable → 117 On value low flow cutoff → 117 Off value low flow cutoff → 118 Pressure shock suppression → 118 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry Select process variable for low flow cut off. • Off • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow Volume flow Positive floatingpoint number Depends on country and nominal diameter Assign process variable – On value low flow cutoff A process variable is selected Enter on value for low flow cut in the Assign process variable off. parameter (→ 117). Endress+Hauser Factory setting 117 Commissioning Parameter Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry Factory setting Off value low flow cutoff A process variable is selected Enter off value for low flow cut 0 to 100.0 % in the Assign process variable off. parameter (→ 117). 50 % Pressure shock suppression A process variable is selected Enter time frame for signal in the Assign process variable suppression (= active pressure parameter (→ 117). shock suppression). 0s 118 0 to 100 s Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning 10.5.11 Configuring empty pipe detection • The measuring instruments are calibrated with water (approx. 500 µS/cm) at the factory. For liquids with a lower conductivity, it is advisable to perform a new full pipe adjustment onsite. • It is recommended to perform a new empty pipe adjustment onsite if a cable that is longer than 50 meters is used. The Empty pipe detection submenu contains parameters that must be configured for the configuration of empty pipe detection. Navigation "Setup" menu → Empty pipe detection ‣ Empty pipe detection Empty pipe detection → 119 New adjustment → 119 Progress → 119 Switch point empty pipe detection → 119 Response time empty pipe detection → 119 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User interface / User entry Factory setting Empty pipe detection – Switch empty pipe detection on • Off and off. • On Off New adjustment The On option is selected in the Empty pipe detection parameter. Select type of adjustment. • Cancel • Empty pipe adjust • Full pipe adjust Cancel Progress The On option is selected in the Empty pipe detection parameter. Shows the progress. • Ok • Busy • Not ok – Switch point empty pipe detection The On option is selected in the Empty pipe detection parameter. Enter hysteresis in %, below this value the measuring tube will detected as empty. 0 to 100 % 50 % Response time empty pipe detection A process variable is selected Use this function to enter the in the Assign process variable minimum time (hold time) the parameter (→ 119). signal must be present before diagnostic message S962 "Empty pipe" is triggered in the event of a partially filled or empty measuring pipe. 0 to 100 s 1s 10.5.12 Configuring the relay output The Relay output wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters that have to be set for configuring the relay output. Endress+Hauser 119 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Navigation "Setup" menu → Relay output 1 to n ‣ Relay output 1 to n Terminal number → 120 Relay output function → 120 Assign flow direction check → 120 Assign limit → 121 Assign diagnostic behavior → 121 Assign status → 121 Switch-off value → 121 Switch-off delay → 121 Switch-on value → 121 Switch-on delay → 121 Failure mode → 121 Switch state → 121 Powerless relay status → 121 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface / Selection / User entry Factory setting Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers used by the relay output module. • Not used • 24-25 (I/O 2) • 22-23 (I/O 3) • 20-21 (I/O 4) – Relay output function – Select the function for the relay output. • Closed • Open • Diagnostic behavior • Limit • Flow direction check • Digital Output Closed Assign flow direction check The Flow direction check option is selected in the Relay output function parameter. Select process variable for flow direction monitoring. 120 Volume flow Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter Commissioning Prerequisite Description User interface / Selection / User entry Factory setting Assign limit The Limit option is selected in Relay output function parameter. Select process variable for limit • Off function. • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Flow velocity • Conductivity * • Corrected conductivity * • Totalizer 1 • Totalizer 2 • Totalizer 3 • Temperature * • Electronics temperature Volume flow Assign diagnostic behavior In the Relay output function parameter, the Diagnostic behavior option is selected. Select diagnostic behavior for switch output. • Alarm • Alarm or warning • Warning Alarm Assign status In the Relay output function parameter, the Digital Output option is selected. Select device status for switch output. • Partially filled pipe Partially filled pipe detection detection • Low flow cut off • HBSI limit exceeded * Switch-off value The Limit option is selected in the Relay output function parameter. Enter measured value for the switch-off point. Signed floating-point number Depends on country: • 0 l/h • 0 gal(us)/min Switch-off delay In the Relay output function parameter, the Limit option is selected. Define delay for the switch-off of status output. 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s Switch-on value The Limit option is selected in the Relay output function parameter. Enter measured value for the switch-on point. Signed floating-point number Depends on country: • 0 l/h • 0 gal(us)/min Switch-on delay In the Relay output function parameter, the Limit option is selected. Define delay for the switch-on of status output. 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s Failure mode – Define output behavior in alarm condition. • Actual status • Open • Closed Open Switch state – Shows the current relay switch status. • Open • Closed – Powerless relay status – Select quietscent state for relay. • Open • Closed Open * Visibility depends on order options or device settings 10.5.13 Configuring the double pulse output The Double pulse output submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters that have to be set for configuring the double pulse output. Navigation "Setup" menu → Double pulse output ‣ Double pulse output Signal mode Endress+Hauser → 122 121 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Master terminal number → 122 Assign pulse output → 122 Measuring mode → 122 Value per pulse → 122 Pulse width → 122 Failure mode → 122 Invert output signal → 122 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Description Selection / User interface / User entry Factory setting Signal mode Select the signal mode for the double pulse output. • Passive • Active * • Passive NE Passive Master terminal number Shows the terminal numbers used by the master of the double pulse output module. • Not used • 24-25 (I/O 2) • 22-23 (I/O 3) – Assign pulse output 1 Select process variable for pulse output. • Off • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow Off Measuring mode Select measuring mode for pulse output. • Forward flow • Forward/Reverse flow • Reverse flow • Reverse flow compensation Forward flow Value per pulse Enter measured value at which a pulse is output. Signed floating-point number Depends on country and nominal diameter Pulse width Define time width of the output pulse. 0.5 to 2 000 ms 0.5 ms Failure mode Define output behavior in alarm condition. • Actual value • No pulses No pulses Invert output signal Invert the output signal. • No • Yes No * Visibility depends on order options or device settings 10.5.14 Configuring flow damping The Configure flow damping wizard guides the user systematically through the parameters, depending on the selected scenario: • Configuration of damping for the application To configure flow damping for the specific requirements of the process application. • Replace old device To adopt the flow damping for the new device in the event of a device replacement. • Restoring factory settings To restore the factory settings of all the parameters that are relevant for flow damping. 122 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning Navigation "Setup" menu → Configure flow damping ‣ Configure flow damping Scenario → 123 Old device → 123 CIP filter on → 123 Damping level → 123 Flow change rate → 124 Application → 124 Pulsating flow → 124 Flow peaks → 124 Damping level → 123 Filter options → 124 Median filter depth → 124 Flow damping → 124 Support ID → 124 Save settings → 124 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Description Selection / User interface Factory setting Scenario Select the applicable scenario. • Replace old device • Configure damping for application • Restore factory settings Configure damping for application Old device Select the measuring device to replace. • Promag 10 (pre-2021) • Promag 50/53 • Promag 55 H Promag 50/53 CIP filter on Indicate whether the CIP filter was applied for the device to be replaced. • No • Yes No Damping level Select the degree of damping to apply. • Default • Weak • Strong Default Endress+Hauser 123 Commissioning Parameter Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Description Selection / User interface Factory setting Flow change rate Select the rate at which the flow changes. • Once a day or less • Once an hour or less • Once a minute or less • Once a second or more Once a minute or less Application Select the type of application that applies. • Display flow • Control loop • Totalizing • Batching Display flow Pulsating flow Indicate whether the process is characterized • No by pulsating flow (e.g. due to a displacement • Yes pump). No Flow peaks Select the frequency at which flow interference peaks occur. • Never • Sporadically • Regularly • Continuously Never • Fast • Slow • Normal Normal • Adaptive • Adaptive CIP on • Dynamic • Dynamic CIP on • Binomial • Binomial CIP on Binomial Response Time Filter options Shows the type of flow filter recommended for damping. Median filter depth Shows median filter depth recommended for 0 to 255 damping. 6 Flow damping Shows the flow filter depth recommended for damping. 0 to 15 7 Support ID If the recommended settings are not satisfactory: please contact your Endress +Hauser service organization with the support ID displayed. 0 to 65 535 0 Save settings Indicate whether to save the recommended settings. • Cancel • Save * Cancel • Completed • Aborted Aborted Filter Wizard result: * 124 Visibility depends on order options or device settings Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 10.6 Commissioning Advanced settings The Advanced setup submenu with its submenus contains parameters for specific settings. Navigation to the "Advanced setup" submenu XXXXXXXXX 20.50 mA 1. 0104-1 Main menu Display language English Display/operat. Setup 2. Main menu Display/operat. Setup Diagnostic / ../Setup Medium selection 3. XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX / ../Setup XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Advanced setup 4. / ../Advanced setup Ent. access code 5. Device tag Def. access code 0092-1 **** A0032223-EN The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version and the available application packages. These submenus and their parameters are explained in the Special Documentation for the device and not in Operating Instructions. For detailed information on the parameter descriptions for application packages: Special Documentation for the device Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup ‣ Advanced setup Endress+Hauser Enter access code → 126 ‣ Sensor adjustment → 126 ‣ Totalizer 1 to n → 126 125 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 10.6.1 ‣ Display → 128 ‣ Electrode cleaning cycle → 131 ‣ WLAN settings → 132 ‣ Configuration backup → 134 ‣ Administration → 135 Using the parameter to enter the access code Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Enter access code Description User entry Enter access code to disable write protection of parameters. 10.6.2 Max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special characters Carrying out a sensor adjustment The Sensor adjustment submenu contains parameters that pertain to the functionality of the sensor. Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Sensor adjustment ‣ Sensor adjustment → 126 Installation direction Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Installation direction Description Select sign of flow direction. 10.6.3 Selection • Forward flow • Reverse flow Factory setting Forward flow Configuring the totalizer In the "Totalizer 1 to n" submenu, you can configure the specific totalizer. 126 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Totalizer 1 to n ‣ Totalizer 1 to n Assign process variable → 127 Unit totalizer 1 to n → 127 Totalizer operation mode → 127 Failure mode → 127 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Assign process variable – Unit totalizer 1 to n Description Factory setting • Off • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow Volume flow A process variable is selected Select the unit for the process in the Assign process variable variable of the totalizer. parameter (→ 127) of the Totalizer 1 to n submenu. Unit choose list Depends on country: • l • gal (us) Totalizer operation mode A process variable is selected Select totalizer calculation in the Assign process variable mode. parameter (→ 127) of the Totalizer 1 to n submenu. • Net • Forward • Reverse Net Failure mode A process variable is selected Select totalizer behavior in the in the Assign process variable event of a device alarm. parameter (→ 127) of the Totalizer 1 to n submenu. • Hold • Continue • Last valid value + continue Hold Endress+Hauser Select process variable for totalizer. Selection 127 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 10.6.4 Carrying out additional display configurations In the Display submenu you can set all the parameters associated with the configuration of the local display. Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Display ‣ Display 128 Format display → 129 Value 1 display → 129 0% bargraph value 1 → 129 100% bargraph value 1 → 129 Decimal places 1 → 129 Value 2 display → 129 Decimal places 2 → 129 Value 3 display → 129 0% bargraph value 3 → 130 100% bargraph value 3 → 130 Decimal places 3 → 130 Value 4 display → 130 Decimal places 4 → 130 Display language → 130 Display interval → 130 Display damping → 130 Header → 130 Header text → 130 Separator → 131 Backlight → 131 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry Factory setting Format display A local display is provided. Select how measured values are shown on the display. • 1 value, max. size • 1 bargraph + 1 value • 2 values • 1 value large + 2 values • 4 values 1 value, max. size Value 1 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that is shown on the local display. • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Flow velocity • Corrected conductivity * • Totalizer 1 • Totalizer 2 • Totalizer 3 • Current output 1 * • Current output 2 * • Current output 3 * • Current output 4 * • Temperature * • Electronics temperature • HBSI * • Noise * • Coil current shot time * • Reference electrode potential against PE * • Build-up index * • Test point 1 • Test point 2 • Test point 3 Volume flow 0% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 0% value for bar graph display. Signed floating-point number Country-specific: • 0 l/h • 0 gal/min (us) 100% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 100% value for bar graph display. Signed floating-point number Depends on country and nominal diameter Decimal places 1 A measured value is specified in the Value 1 display parameter. Select the number of decimal places for the display value. • x • x.x • x.xx • x.xxx • x.xxxx x.xx Value 2 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that is shown on the local display. For the picklist, see Value 1 display parameter (→ 116) None Decimal places 2 A measured value is specified in the Value 2 display parameter. Select the number of decimal places for the display value. • x • x.x • x.xx • x.xxx • x.xxxx x.xx Value 3 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that is shown on the local display. For the picklist, see Value 1 display parameter (→ 116) None Endress+Hauser 129 Commissioning Parameter Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry 0% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Value 3 display parameter. Enter 0% value for bar graph display. Signed floating-point number Country-specific: • 0 l/h • 0 gal/min (us) 100% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Value 3 display parameter. Enter 100% value for bar graph display. Signed floating-point number 0 Decimal places 3 A measured value is specified in the Value 3 display parameter. Select the number of decimal places for the display value. • x • x.x • x.xx • x.xxx • x.xxxx x.xx Value 4 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that is shown on the local display. For the picklist, see Value 1 display parameter (→ 116) None Decimal places 4 A measured value is specified in the Value 4 display parameter. Select the number of decimal places for the display value. • x • x.x • x.xx • x.xxx • x.xxxx x.xx Display language A local display is provided. Set display language. • English • Deutsch • Français • Español • Italiano • Nederlands • Portuguesa • Polski • русский язык (Russian) • Svenska • Türkçe • 中文 (Chinese) • 日本語 (Japanese) • 한국어 (Korean) • tiếng Việt (Vietnamese) • čeština (Czech) English (alternatively, the ordered language is preset in the device) Display interval A local display is provided. Set time measured values are shown on display if display alternates between values. 1 to 10 s 5s Display damping A local display is provided. Set display reaction time to fluctuations in the measured value. 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s Header A local display is provided. Select header contents on local • Device tag display. • Free text Device tag Header text The Free text option is selected in the Header parameter. Enter display header text. ------------ 130 Max. 12 characters, such as letters, numbers or special characters (e.g. @, %, /) Factory setting Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter Commissioning Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry Factory setting Separator A local display is provided. Select decimal separator for displaying numerical values. • . (point) • , (comma) . (point) Backlight One of the following conditions is met: • Order code for "Display; operation", option F "4-line, illum.; touch control" • Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illum.; touch control +WLAN" Switch the local display backlight on and off. • Disable • Enable Enable * Visibility depends on order options or device settings 10.6.5 Performing electrode cleaning The Electrode cleaning cycle submenu contains the parameters that must be set for the configuration of electrode cleaning. The submenu is only available if the device was ordered with electrode cleaning. Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Electrode cleaning cycle ‣ Electrode cleaning cycle Electrode cleaning cycle → 131 ECC duration → 131 ECC recovery time → 131 ECC interval → 132 ECC polarity → 132 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry / User interface Factory setting Electrode cleaning cycle For the following order code: "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning" Switch electrode cleaning on or • Off off. • On On ECC duration For the following order code: "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning" Enter the duration of the electrode cleaning cycle. 0.01 to 30 s 2s ECC recovery time For the following order code: "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning" Specify the recovery time after electrode cleaning to prevent interference.The output signal values will be frozen for the duration of the recovery. 1 to 600 s 60 s Endress+Hauser 131 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry / User interface Factory setting ECC interval For the following order code: "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning" Enter the pause duration between electrode cleaning cycles. 0.5 to 168 h 0.5 h ECC polarity For the following order code: "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning" Select the polarity of the electrode cleaning circuit. • Positive • Negative Depends on the electrode material: • Tantalum: Negative option • Platinum, Alloy C22, stainless steel: Positive option 10.6.6 WLAN configuration The WLAN Settings submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters that have to be set for the WLAN configuration. Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup → WLAN settings ‣ WLAN settings 132 WLAN → 133 WLAN mode → 133 SSID name → 133 Network security → 133 Security identification → 133 User name → 133 WLAN password → 133 WLAN IP address → 133 WLAN MAC address → 133 WLAN passphrase → 133 Assign SSID name → 133 SSID name → 133 Connection state → 133 Received signal strength → 133 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry / User interface Factory setting WLAN – Switch WLAN on and off. • Disable • Enable Enable WLAN mode – Select WLAN mode. • WLAN access point • WLAN Client WLAN access point SSID name The client is activated. Enter the user-defined SSID name (max. 32 characters). – – Network security – Select the security type of the WLAN network. • Unsecured • WPA2-PSK • EAP-PEAP with MSCHAPv2 * • EAP-PEAP MSCHAPv2 no server authentic. * • EAP-TLS * WPA2-PSK Security identification – Select security settings and download these settings via menu Data management > Security > WLAN. • Trusted issuer certificate • Device certificate • Device private key – User name – Enter user name. – – WLAN password – Enter WLAN password. – – WLAN IP address – Enter IP address of the WLAN interface of the device. 4 octet: 0 to 255 (in the particular octet) 192.168.1.212 WLAN MAC address – Enter MAC address of the WLAN interface of the device. Unique 12-digit character string comprising letters and numbers Each measuring device is given an individual address. WLAN passphrase The WPA2-PSK option is selected in the Security type parameter. Enter the network key (8 to 32 8 to 32-digit characters). character string comprising numbers, The network key supplied with the device letters and special characters (without should be changed spaces) during commissioning Serial number of the measuring device (e.g. L100A802000) for security reasons. Assign SSID name – Select which name will be used • Device tag for SSID: device tag or user• User-defined defined name. User-defined SSID name • The User-defined option is selected in the Assign SSID name parameter. • The WLAN access point option is selected in the WLAN mode parameter. Enter the user-defined SSID name (max. 32 characters). EH_device designation_last 7 digits of the serial number (e.g. EH_Promag_500_A 802000) Connection state – Displays the connection status. • Connected • Not connected Not connected Received signal strength – Shows the received signal strength. High * Max. 32-digit character string comprising numbers, The user-defined SSID letters and special name may only be assigned once. If the SSID characters name is assigned more than once, the devices can interfere with one another. • Low • Medium • High Visibility depends on order options or device settings Endress+Hauser 133 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 10.6.7 Configuration management After commissioning, you can save the current device configurationor restore the previous device configuration. The device configuration is managed via the Configuration management parameter. Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Configuration backup ‣ Configuration backup Operating time → 134 Last backup → 134 Configuration management → 134 Backup state → 134 Comparison result → 134 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Description User interface / Selection Factory setting Operating time Indicates how long the device has been in operation. Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds (s) – Last backup Shows when the last data backup was saved to HistoROM backup. Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds (s) – Configuration management Select action for managing the device data in • Cancel the HistoROM backup. • Execute backup • Restore * • Compare * • Clear backup data Cancel Backup state Shows the current status of data saving or restoring. • None • Backup in progress • Restoring in progress • Delete in progress • Compare in progress • Restoring failed • Backup failed None Comparison result Comparison of current device data with HistoROM backup. • Settings identical • Settings not identical • No backup available • Backup settings corrupt • Check not done • Dataset incompatible Check not done * 134 Visibility depends on order options or device settings Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning Function scope of the "Configuration management" parameter Options Description Cancel No action is executed and the user exits the parameter. Execute backup A backup copy of the current device configuration is saved from the HistoROM backup to the memory of the device. The backup copy includes the transmitter data of the device. Restore The last backup copy of the device configuration is restored from the device memory to the device's HistoROM backup. The backup copy includes the transmitter data of the device. Compare The device configuration saved in the device memory is compared with the current device configuration of the HistoROM backup. Clear backup data The backup copy of the device configuration is deleted from the memory of the device. HistoROM backup A HistoROM is a "non-volatile" device memory in the form of an EEPROM. While this action is in progress, the configuration cannot be edited via the local display and a message on the processing status appears on the display. 10.6.8 Using parameters for device administration The Administration submenu systematically guides the user through all the parameters that can be used for device administration purposes. Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration ‣ Administration ‣ Define access code → 135 ‣ Reset access code → 136 Device reset → 136 Using the parameter to define the access code Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Define access code ‣ Define access code Endress+Hauser Define access code → 136 Confirm access code → 136 135 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Description User entry Define access code Restrict write-access to parameters to protect the configuration of the device against unintentional changes. Max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special characters Confirm access code Confirm the entered access code. Max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special characters Using the parameter to reset the access code Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Reset access code ‣ Reset access code Operating time → 136 Reset access code → 136 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Description User interface / User entry Factory setting Operating time Indicates how long the device has been in operation. Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds (s) – Reset access code Reset access code to factory settings. Character string comprising numbers, letters and special characters 0x00 For a reset code, contact your Endress+Hauser service organization. The reset code can only be entered via: • Web browser • DeviceCare, FieldCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface) • Fieldbus Using the parameter to reset the device Navigation "Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Device reset * Description Reset the device configuration - either entirely or in part - to a defined state. Selection • Cancel • To delivery settings • Restart device • Restore S-DAT backup * Factory setting Cancel Visibility depends on order options or device settings 10.7 Simulation Via the Simulation submenu, it is possible to simulate various process variables in the process and the device alarm mode and verify downstream signal chains (switching valves 136 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning or closed-control loops). The simulation can be performed without a real measurement (no flow of medium through the device). Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Simulation ‣ Simulation Endress+Hauser Assign simulation process variable → 138 Process variable value → 138 Current input 1 to n simulation → 139 Value current input 1 to n → 139 Status input simulation 1 to n → 139 Input signal level 1 to n → 139 Current output 1 to n simulation → 138 Current output value → 138 Frequency output 1 to n simulation → 138 Frequency output 1 to n value → 138 Pulse output simulation 1 to n → 138 Pulse value 1 to n → 138 Switch output simulation 1 to n → 138 Switch state 1 to n → 138 Relay output 1 to n simulation → 138 Switch state 1 to n → 138 Pulse output simulation → 138 Pulse value → 138 Device alarm simulation → 139 Diagnostic event category → 139 Diagnostic event simulation → 139 137 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry Factory setting Assign simulation process variable – Select a process variable for the simulation process that is activated. • Off • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Flow velocity • Conductivity * • Corrected conductivity * • Temperature * Off Process variable value A process variable is selected in the Assign simulation process variable parameter (→ 138). Enter the simulation value for the selected process variable. Depends on the process variable selected 0 Current output 1 to n simulation – Switch the simulation of the current output on and off. • Off • On Off Current output value In the Current output 1 to n simulation parameter, the On option is selected. Enter the current value for simulation. 3.59 to 22.5 mA 3.59 mA Frequency output 1 to n simulation In the Operating mode parameter, the Frequency option is selected. Switch the simulation of the frequency output on and off. • Off • On Off Frequency output 1 to n value In the Frequency simulation 1 to n parameter, the On option is selected. Enter the frequency value for the simulation. 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz Pulse output simulation 1 to n In the Operating mode parameter, the Pulse option is selected. Set and switch off the pulse output simulation. • Off • Fixed value • Down-counting value Off Fixed value option: For Pulse width parameter (→ 110) defines the pulse width of the pulses output. Pulse value 1 to n In the Pulse output simulation 1 to n parameter, the Down-counting value option is selected. Enter the number of pulses for simulation. 0 to 65 535 0 Switch output simulation 1 to n In the Operating mode parameter, the Switch option is selected. Switch the simulation of the switch output on and off. • Off • On Off Switch state 1 to n – Select the status of the status output for the simulation. • Open • Closed Open Relay output 1 to n simulation – Switch simulation of the relay output on and off. • Off • On Off Switch state 1 to n The On option is selected in the Switch output simulation 1 to n parameter parameter. Select status of the relay output for the simulation. • Open • Closed Open Pulse output simulation – Set and switch off the pulse output simulation. • Off • Fixed value • Down-counting value Off 0 to 65 535 0 Fixed value option: For Pulse width parameter defines the pulse width of the pulses output. Pulse value 138 In the Pulse output simulation parameter, the Down-counting value option is selected. Set and switch off the pulse output simulation. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter Commissioning Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry Factory setting Device alarm simulation – Switch the device alarm on and • Off off. • On Off Diagnostic event category – Select a diagnostic event category. • Sensor • Electronics • Configuration • Process Process Diagnostic event simulation – Select a diagnostic event to simulate this event. • Off • Diagnostic event picklist (depends on the category selected) Off Current input 1 to n simulation – Switch simulation of the current input on and off. • Off • On Off Value current input 1 to n In the Current input 1 to n simulation parameter, the On option is selected. Enter the current value for simulation. 0 to 22.5 mA 0 mA Status input simulation 1 to n – Switch simulation of the status • Off input on and off. • On Input signal level 1 to n In the Status input simulation Select the signal level for the parameter, the On option is simulation of the status input. selected. * • High • Low Off High Visibility depends on order options or device settings 10.8 Protecting settings from unauthorized access The following write protection options exist in order to protect the configuration of the measuring device from unintentional modification: • Protect access to parameters via access code → 139 • Protect access to local operation via key locking → 80 • Protect access to measuring device via write protection switch → 141 10.8.1 Write protection via access code The effects of the user-specific access code are as follows: • Via local operation, the parameters for the measuring device configuration are writeprotected and their values can no longer be changed. • Device access is protected via the Web browser, as are the parameters for the measuring device configuration. • Device access is protected via FieldCare or DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), as are the parameters for the measuring device configuration. Defining the access code via the local display Endress+Hauser 1. Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→ 136). 2. Maximum of 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special characters as the access code. 139 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 3. Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→ 136) to confirm. The symbol appears in front of all write-protected parameters. • Disabling parameter write protection via access code → 79. • If the access code is lost: Resetting the access code → 140. • The user role with which the user is currently logged in is displayed in Access status parameter. • Navigation path: Operation → Access status • User roles and their access rights → 79 • The device automatically locks the write-protected parameters again if a key is not pressed for 10 minutes in the navigation and editing view. • The device locks the write-protected parameters automatically after 60 s if the user skips back to the operational display mode from the navigation and editing view. Parameters which can always be modified via the local display Certain parameters that do not affect the measurement are excepted from parameter write protection via the local display. Despite the user-specific access code, they can always be modified, even if the other parameters are locked. Parameters for configuring the language Parameters for configuring the local display Parameters for configuring the totalizer ↓ ↓ ↓ Display language Format display Control Totalizer Contrast display Preset value Display interval Reset all totalizers Defining the access code via the web browser 1. Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→ 136). 2. Define a 16-digit (max.) numeric code as the access code. 3. Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→ 136) to confirm. The web browser switches to the login page. • Disabling parameter write protection via access code → 79. • If the access code is lost: Resetting the access code → 140. • The Access status parameter shows which user role the user is currently logged in with. • Navigation path: Operation → Access status • User roles and their access rights → 79 If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the web browser automatically returns to the login page. Resetting the access code If you misplace the user-specific access code, it is possible to reset the code to the factory setting. A reset code must be entered for this purpose. The user-specific access code can then be defined again afterwards. 140 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Commissioning Via Web browser, FieldCare, DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), fieldbus You can only obtain a reset code from your local Endress+Hauser service organization. The code must be calculated explicitly for every device. 1. Note down the serial number of the device. 2. Read off the Operating time parameter. 3. Contact the local Endress+Hauser service organization and tell them the serial number and the operating time. Get the calculated reset code. 4. Enter the reset code in the Reset access code parameter (→ 136). The access code has been reset to the factory setting 0000. It can be redefined → 139. For IT security reasons, the calculated reset code is only valid for 96 hours from the specified operating time and for the specific serial number. If you cannot return to the device within 96 hours, you should either increase the operating time you read out by a few days or switch off the device. 10.8.2 Write protection via write protection switch Unlike parameter write protection via a user-specific access code, this allows the user to lock write access to the entire operating menu - apart from the "Contrast display" parameter. The parameter values are now read only and cannot be edited any more (exception "Contrast display" parameter): • Via local display • Via MODBUS RS485 protocol Proline 500 – digital Enable/disable write protection r Po we I/O I/O I/O 2 3 4 ES C + Po we r op en pres s ES - E C + - op en pres s 3. 2. I/O 2 P er ow 1. 2 3 4 I/O 3 I/O 3 1 Off 4. On A0029673 Endress+Hauser 1. Open the housing cover. 2. Remove the display module. 3. Fold open the terminal cover. 141 Commissioning Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 4. Enable or disable write protection: Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the ON position enables hardware write protection/setting to OFF (factory setting) disables hardware write protection. In the Locking status parameter, the Hardware locked option is displayed → 143. When hardware write protection is enabled, the symbol appears in the header of the measured value display and in the navigation view in front of the parameters. XXXXXXXXX 20.50 XX XX A0029425 5. Insert the display module. 6. Close the housing cover. 7. NOTICE Excessive tightening torque applied to the fixing screws! Risk of damaging the plastic transmitter. ‣ Tighten the fixing screws as per the tightening torque: 2.5 Nm (1.8 lbf ft) Tighten the fixing screws. Proline 500 1. OFF ON 1 2 3 4 A0029630 Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the ON position enables hardware write protection. In the Locking status parameter, the Hardware locked option is displayed → 143. In addition, on the local display the symbol appears in front of the parameters in the header of the operational display and in the navigation view. XXXXXXXXX 20.50 XX XX A0029425 2. 142 Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the OFF position (factory setting) disables hardware write protection. No option is displayed in the Locking status parameter → 143. On the local display, the symbol disappears from in front of the parameters in the header of the operational display and in the navigation view. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Operation 11 Operation 11.1 Reading off the device locking status Device active write protection: Locking status parameter Operation → Locking status Function scope of the "Locking status" parameter Options Description None The access authorization displayed in the Access status parameter applies → 79. Only appears on local display. Hardware locked The DIP switch for hardware locking is activated on the PCB board. This locks write access to the parameters (e.g. via local display or operating tool) → 141. CT active - all parameters The DIP switch for custody transfer mode is activated on the PCB board. Locks the parameters that are relevant for custody transfer and also parameters that are predefined by Endress+Hauser and are not relevant for custody transfer (e.g. on local display or operating tool). detailed information on custody transfer mode, see the Special For Documentation for the device CT active - defined parameters The DIP switch for the custody transfer mode is activated on the PCB board. Only locks the parameters that are relevant for custody transfer (e.g. on the local display or operating tool). detailed information on custody transfer mode, see the Special For Documentation for the device Temporarily locked 11.2 Write access to the parameters is temporarily locked on account of internal processes running in the device (e.g. data upload/download, reset, etc.). Once the internal processing has been completed, the parameters can be changed once again. Reading off measured values With the Measured values submenu, it is possible to read all the measured values. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Measured values ‣ Measured values 11.2.1 ‣ Process variables → 143 ‣ Input values → 145 ‣ Output values → 146 ‣ Totalizer → 145 "Process variables" submenu The Process variables submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for each process variable. Endress+Hauser 143 Operation Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Process variables ‣ Process variables Volume flow → 144 Mass flow → 144 Corrected volume flow → 144 Flow velocity → 144 Conductivity → 144 Corrected conductivity → 144 Temperature → 145 Density → 145 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Volume flow Prerequisite – Description Displays the volume flow that is currently measured. User interface Signed floating-point number Dependency The unit is taken from: Volume flow unit parameter (→ 101) Mass flow – Displays the mass flow that is currently calculated. Signed floating-point number Dependency The unit is taken from the Mass flow unit parameter (→ 102). Corrected volume flow – Displays the corrected volume flow that is currently calculated. Signed floating-point number Dependency The unit is taken from: Corrected volume flow unit parameter (→ 102) Flow velocity – Displays the flow velocity that is currently calculated. Signed floating-point number Conductivity – Displays the conductivity that is currently measured. Signed floating-point number Dependency The unit is taken from the Conductivity unit parameter (→ 101). Corrected conductivity 144 One of the following conditions is met: • Order code for "Sensor option", option CI "Medium temperature measurement" or • The temperature is read into the flowmeter from an external device. Displays the conductivity currently corrected. Positive floating-point number Dependency The unit is taken from: Conductivity unit parameter (→ 101) Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter Temperature Density Operation Prerequisite Description User interface One of the following conditions is met: • Order code for "Sensor option", option CI "Medium temperature measurement" or • The temperature is read into the flowmeter from an external device. Displays the temperature that is currently calculated. Positive floating-point number – Displays the current fixed density or Signed floating-point density read in from an external device. number Dependency The unit is taken from: Temperature unit parameter (→ 101) Dependency The unit is taken from: Density unit parameter 11.2.2 "Totalizer" submenu The Totalizer submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every totalizer. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Totalizer ‣ Totalizer Totalizer value 1 to n → 145 Totalizer overflow 1 to n → 145 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface Totalizer value 1 to n A process variable is selected in the Assign process variable parameter (→ 127) of the Totalizer 1 to n submenu. Displays the current totalizer counter value. Signed floating-point number Totalizer overflow 1 to n A process variable is selected in the Assign process variable parameter (→ 127) of the Totalizer 1 to n submenu. Displays the current totalizer overflow. Integer with sign 11.2.3 "Input values" submenu The Input values submenu guides you systematically to the individual input values. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values ‣ Input values Endress+Hauser ‣ Current input 1 to n → 146 ‣ Status input 1 to n → 146 145 Operation Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Input values of current input The Current input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every current input. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Current input 1 to n ‣ Current input 1 to n Measured values 1 to n → 146 Measured current 1 to n → 146 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Description User interface Measured values 1 to n Displays the current input value. Signed floating-point number Measured current 1 to n Displays the current value of the current input. 0 to 22.5 mA Input values of status input The Status input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every status input. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Status input 1 to n ‣ Status input 1 to n → 146 Value status input Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Value status input Description Shows the current input signal level. 11.2.4 User interface • High • Low Output values The Output values submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every output. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values ‣ Output values ‣ Current output 1 to n 146 → 147 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Operation ‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output → 147 ‣ Relay output 1 to n → 148 ‣ Double pulse output → 148 1 to n Output values of current output The Value current output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every current output. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Value current output 1 to n ‣ Current output 1 to n Output current 1 to n → 147 Measured current 1 to n → 147 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Description User interface Output current 1 Displays the current value currently calculated for the current output. 3.59 to 22.5 mA Measured current Displays the current value currently measured for the current output. 0 to 30 mA Output values for pulse/frequency/switch output The Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every pulse/frequency/switch output. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n ‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n Endress+Hauser Output frequency 1 to n → 148 Pulse output 1 to n → 148 Switch state 1 to n → 148 147 Operation Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface Output frequency 1 to n In the Operating mode parameter, the Frequency option is selected. Displays the value currently measured for the frequency output. Pulse output 1 to n The Pulse option is selected in the Displays the pulse frequency currently Operating mode parameter parameter. output. Positive floating-point number Switch state 1 to n The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter. • Open • Closed 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz Displays the current switch output status. Output values for relay output The Relay output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every relay output. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Relay output 1 to n ‣ Relay output 1 to n Switch state → 148 Switch cycles → 148 Max. switch cycles number → 148 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Description User interface Switch state Shows the current relay switch status. • Open • Closed Switch cycles Shows number of all performed switch cycles. Positive integer Max. switch cycles number Shows the maximal number of guaranteed switch cycles. Positive integer Output values for double pulse output The Double pulse output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every double pulse output. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Double pulse output ‣ Double pulse output Pulse output 148 → 149 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Operation Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Pulse output Description User interface Shows the currently output pulse frequency. 11.3 Positive floating-point number Adapting the measuring device to the process conditions The following are available for this purpose: • Basic settings using theSetup menu (→ 99) • Advanced settings using theAdvanced setup submenu (→ 125) 11.4 Performing a totalizer reset The totalizers are reset in the Operation submenu: • Control Totalizer • Reset all totalizers Navigation "Operation" menu → Totalizer handling ‣ Totalizer handling Control Totalizer 1 to n → 149 Preset value 1 to n → 149 Totalizer value 1 to n → 150 Reset all totalizers → 150 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry / User interface Control Totalizer 1 to n A process variable is selected Control totalizer value. in the Assign process variable parameter (→ 127) of the Totalizer 1 to n submenu. • Totalize • Reset + hold * • Preset + hold * • Reset + totalize • Preset + totalize * • Hold * Preset value 1 to n A process variable is selected Specify start value for totalizer. Signed floating-point in the Assign process variable Dependency number parameter (→ 127) of the The unit of the selected Totalizer 1 to n submenu. process variable is defined in the Unit totalizer parameter (→ 127) for the totalizer. Factory setting Totalize 0l Endress+Hauser 149 Operation Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User entry / User interface Factory setting Totalizer value A process variable is selected Displays the current totalizer in the Assign process variable counter value. parameter (→ 127) of the Totalizer 1 to n submenu. Signed floating-point number – Reset all totalizers – • Cancel • Reset + totalize Cancel * Reset all totalizers to 0 and start. Visibility depends on order options or device settings 11.4.1 Function scope of "Control Totalizer" parameter Options Description Totalize The totalizer is started or continues running. Reset + hold Preset + hold The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is reset to 0. 1) The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is set to its defined start value from the Preset value parameter. Reset + totalize Preset + totalize Hold 1) The totalizer is set to the defined start value in the Preset value parameter and the totaling process is restarted. Totalizing is stopped. Visible depending on the order options or device settings 11.4.2 150 The totalizer is reset to 0 and the totaling process is restarted. 1) Function range of "Reset all totalizers" parameter Options Description Cancel No action is executed and the user exits the parameter. Reset + totalize Resets all totalizers to 0 and restarts the totaling process. This deletes all the previously aggregated flow values. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Diagnostics and troubleshooting 12 Diagnostics and troubleshooting 12.1 General troubleshooting For local display Error Possible causes Remedial action Local display is dark, but signal output is within the valid range The cable of the display module is not plugged in Insert the plug correctly into the main correctly. electronics module and display module. Local display dark and no output signals Supply voltage does not match the voltage specified on the nameplate. Apply the correct supply voltage → 54→ 49. Local display dark and no output signals Supply voltage has incorrect polarity. Reverse polarity of supply voltage. Local display dark and no output signals No contact between connecting cables and terminals. Ensure electrical contact between the cable and the terminal. Local display dark and no output signals • Terminals are not plugged into the I/O electronics module correctly. • Terminals are not plugged into the main electronics module correctly. Check terminals. Local display dark and no output signals • I/O electronics module is defective. • Main electronics module is defective. Order spare part → 175. Local display dark and no output signals The connector between the main electronics module and display module is not plugged in correctly. Check the connection and correct if necessary. Local display dark and no output signals The connecting cable is not plugged in correctly. 1. Check the connection of the electrode cable and correct if necessary. 2. Check the connection of the coil current cable and correct if necessary. Local display cannot be read, but signal output is Display is set too bright or too dark. within the valid range • Set the display brighter by simultaneously pressing + . • Set the display darker by simultaneously pressing + . Local display is dark, but signal output is within the valid range Display module is defective. Order spare part → 175. Backlighting of local display is red Diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior has occurred. Take remedial measures → 162 Text on local display appears in a language that cannot be understood. The selected operating language cannot be understood. 1. Press + for 2 s ("home position"). 2. Press . 3. Configure the required language in the Display language parameter (→ 130). Message on local display: "Communication Error" "Check Electronics" Communication between the display module and • Check the cable and the connector between the electronics is interrupted. the main electronics module and display module. • Order spare part → 175. For output signals Error Possible causes Remedial action Signal output outside the valid range Main electronics module is defective. Order spare part → 175. Device shows correct value on local display, but signal output is incorrect, though in the valid range. Parameter configuration error Check and adjust parameter configuration. Device measures incorrectly. Configuration error or device is operated outside the application. 1. Check and correct parameter configuration. 2. Observe limit values specified in the "Technical Data". Endress+Hauser 151 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 For access Error Possible causes Remedial action Write access to parameter not possible. Hardware write protection is enabled. Set the write protection switch on the main electronics module to the OFF position → 141. Write access to parameter not possible. Current user role has limited access authorization. 1. Check user role → 79. 2. Enter correct customer-specific access code → 79. Connection via Modbus RS485 is not possible. Modbus RS485 bus cable is connected incorrectly. Check the terminal assignment → 40. Connection via Modbus RS485 is not possible. Modbus RS485 cable is incorrectly terminated. Check the terminating resistor → 63. Connection via Modbus RS485 is not possible. Settings for the communication interface are incorrect. Check the Modbus RS485 configuration → 102. Connection to the web server is not possible. Web server is disabled. Use the "FieldCare" or "DeviceCare" operating tool to check if the web server of the device is enabled and enable if necessary → 86. The Ethernet interface is incorrectly configured on the PC. ‣ Check the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) → 82. ‣ Check the network settings with the IT manager. Connection to the web server is not possible. The IP address is incorrectly configured on the PC. Check the IP address: 192.168.1.212 → 82 Connection to the web server is not possible. WLAN access data are incorrect. • Check WLAN network status. • Log on to the device again using WLAN access data. • Check that WLAN is enabled for the device and operating device → 82. WLAN communication is disabled. – It is not possible to connect to the web server, FieldCare or DeviceCare. WLAN network is not available. • Check whether WLAN reception is available: LED on the display module lights up in blue. • Check if the WLAN connection is enabled: LED on display module flashes blue. • Switch on instrument function. No network connection or unstable network connection. WLAN network is weak. • Operating device outside of receiving range: Check the network status on the operating device. • To improve network performance, use an external WLAN antenna. Parallel WLAN and Ethernet communication. • Check network settings. • Temporarily enable only the WLAN as an interface. Data transfer is active. Wait until data transfer or current action is finished. Connection lost ‣ Check cable connection and power supply. ‣ Refresh web browser and restart if Web browser is frozen and no further operation possible. necessary. The web browser contents are difficult to read or The web browser version used is not the best incomplete. option. No contents displayed in the web browser or contents incomplete. ‣ Use correct web browser version → 81. ‣ Empty the web browser cache. ‣ Restart the web browser. Unsuitable view settings. Change the font size/display ratio of the Web browser. • JavaScript is not enabled. • JavaScript cannot be enabled. ‣ Enable JavaScript. ‣ Enter http://XXX.XXX.X.X.XX/servlet/ basic.html as the IP address. 152 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Error Possible causes Remedial action Operation with FieldCare or DeviceCare not possible via CDI-RJ45 service interface (port 8000). Firewall of the PC or network prevents communication. Depending on the settings of the firewall used on the PC or in the network, the firewall must be disabled or adjusted for FieldCare/DeviceCare access. Flashing of firmware with FieldCare or DeviceCare not possible via CDI-RJ45 service interface (port 8000 or TFTP ports). Firewall of the PC or network prevents communication. Depending on the settings of the firewall used on the PC or in the network, the firewall must be disabled or adjusted for FieldCare/DeviceCare access. 12.2 Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes 12.2.1 Transmitter Proline 500 – digital Different LEDs in the transmitter provide information on the device status. r we Po I/O I/O I/O 2 3 4 ES C + Po ES - E we r op en pres s C + - op en pres s 3. 2. I/O 3 I/O 2 P ow er 1. 5 I/O 3 1 2 3 4 A0029689 1 2 3 4 5 Supply voltage Device status Not used Communication Service interface (CDI) active 1. Open the housing cover. 2. Remove the display module. 3. Fold open the terminal cover. LED 1 2 Endress+Hauser Supply voltage Device status (normal operation) Color Meaning Off Supply voltage is off or too low. Green Supply voltage is OK. Off Firmware error Green Device status is OK. 153 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 LED Color Meaning Flashing green Device is not configured. Flashing red A diagnostic event with "Warning" diagnostic behavior has occurred. Red A diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior has occurred. Flashing red or green The device restarts. Device status (during start-up) Flashes red slowly If > 30 seconds: problem with the boot loader. Flashes red quickly If > 30 seconds: compatibility problem when reading the firmware. 3 Not used – – 4 Communication Off Communication not active. White Communication active. Off Not connected or no connection established. Yellow Connected and connection established. Flashing yellow Service interface active. 2 5 Service interface (CDI) Proline 500 Different LEDs in the transmitter provide information on the device status. 1 2 3 4 5 A0029629 1 2 3 4 5 Supply voltage Device status Not used Communication Service interface (CDI) active LED 1 2 2 154 Supply voltage Device status (normal operation) Device status (during start-up) Color Meaning Off Supply voltage is off or too low. Green Supply voltage is OK. Off Firmware error Green Device status is OK. Flashing green Device is not configured. Red A diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior has occurred. Flashing red A diagnostic event with "Warning" diagnostic behavior has occurred. Flashing red or green The device restarts. Flashes red slowly If > 30 seconds: problem with the boot loader. Flashes red quickly If > 30 seconds: compatibility problem when reading the firmware. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Diagnostics and troubleshooting LED Color Meaning 3 Not used – – 4 Communication Off Communication not active. White Communication active. Off Not connected or no connection established. Yellow Connected and connection established. Flashing yellow Service interface active. 5 Service interface (CDI) 12.2.2 Sensor connection housing Proline 500 – digital Various light emitting diodes (LED) on the ISEM electronics unit (intelligent sensor electronics module) in the sensor connection housing provide information about the device status. 1 64 B Communication 63 A Communication 2 Alarm Power 61 L+ 62 L- Power 3 A0029699 1 2 3 Communication Device status Supply voltage LED Meaning 1 Communication White Communication active. 2 Device status (normal operation) Red Error Flashing red Warning Device status (during start-up) Flashes red slowly If > 30 seconds: problem with the boot loader. Flashes red quickly If > 30 seconds: compatibility problem when reading the firmware. Supply voltage Green Supply voltage is ok. Off Supply voltage is off or too low. 2 3 Endress+Hauser Color 155 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 12.3 Diagnostic information on local display 12.3.1 Diagnostic message Faults detected by the self-monitoring system of the measuring device are displayed as a diagnostic message in alternation with the operational display. Operational display in alarm condition Diagnostic message 2 1 XXXXXXXXX S 20.50 S801 3 4 Supply voltage XX X S XXXXXXXXX i Menu 5 A0029426-EN 1 2 3 4 5 Status signal Diagnostic behavior Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code Short text Operating elements If two or more diagnostic events are pending simultaneously, only the message of the diagnostic event with the highest priority is shown. Other diagnostic events that have occurred can be displayed in the Diagnostics menu: • Via parameter → 166 • Via submenus → 166 Status signals The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event). The status signals are categorized according to VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 107: F = Failure, C = Function Check, S = Out of Specification, M = Maintenance Required Symbol Meaning Failure A device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid. Function check The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation). Out of specification The device is being operated: Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range) Maintenance required Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid. 156 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Diagnostic behavior Symbol Meaning Alarm • Measurement is interrupted. • Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition. • A diagnostic message is generated. Warning • Measurement is resumed. • The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. • A diagnostic message is generated. Diagnostic information The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you by providing information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display. Diagnostic information Diagnostic code Diagnostic behavior Status signal Diagnostic number Short text ↓ ↓ ↓ 842 Process limit Example A0013962 A0013958 NAMUR NE 107 3-digit number Operating elements Operating key Meaning Plus key In menu, submenu Opens the message about the remedial measures. Enter key In menu, submenu Opens the operating menu. Endress+Hauser 157 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures S XXXXXXXXX 20.50 S801 Supply voltage i XX X S XXXXXXXXX Menu 1. 1 Diagnostic list Diagnostics 1 S S801 Supply voltage Diagnostics 2 Diagnostics 3 2. 2 4 6 Supply voltage (ID:203) S801 0d00h02m25s Increase supply voltage 3 5 3. A0029431-EN 38 Message for remedial measures 1 2 3 4 5 6 Diagnostic information Short text Service ID Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code Operation time when error occurred Remedial measures 1. The user is in the diagnostic message. Press ( symbol). The Diagnostic list submenu opens. 2. Select the desired diagnostic event with or and press . The message about the remedial measures opens. 3. Press + simultaneously. The message about the remedial measures closes. The user is in the Diagnostics menu at an entry for a diagnostics event, e.g. in the Diagnostic list submenu or Previous diagnostics parameter. 1. Press . The message for the remedial measures for the selected diagnostic event opens. 2. Press + simultaneously. The message for the remedial measures closes. 12.4 Diagnostic information in the web browser 12.4.1 Diagnostic options Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed in the Web browser on the home page once the user has logged on. 158 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Diagnostics and troubleshooting 1 2 3 A0031056 1 2 3 Status area with status signal Diagnostic information Remedial measures with service ID In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics menu: • Via parameter → 166 • Via submenu → 166 Status signals The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event). Symbol Meaning Failure A device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid. Function check The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation). Out of specification The device is being operated: Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range) Maintenance required Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid. The status signals are categorized in accordance with VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 107. 12.4.2 Calling up remedy information Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can be rectified quickly. These measures are displayed in red along with the diagnostic event and the related diagnostic information. 12.5 Diagnostic information in FieldCare or DeviceCare 12.5.1 Diagnostic options Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed on the home page of the operating tool once the connection has been established. Endress+Hauser 159 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 1 Xxxxxx/…/…/ Device name: Xxxxxxx Mass flow: 12.34 kg/h Device tag: Volume flow: 12.34 m³/h Xxxxxxx Status signal: Function check (C) Xxxxxx Diagnostics 1: C485 Simu... P P Remedy information: Deactivate... P Access status tooling: Mainenance + Operation + Setup + Diagnostics + Expert Failure (F) 2 Function check (C) Diagnostics 1: C485 Simulation measured vari... Remedy information: Deactivate Simulation (Service... 3 Out of spezification (S) Maintenance required (M) A0021799-EN 1 2 3 Status area with status signal → 156 Diagnostic information → 157 Remedial measures with service ID In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics menu: • Via parameter → 166 • Via submenu → 166 Diagnostic information The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you by providing information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display. Diagnostic information Diagnostic code Diagnostic behavior Status signal Diagnostic number Short text ↓ ↓ ↓ 842 Process limit Example A0013962 A0013958 NAMUR NE 107 12.5.2 3-digit number Calling up remedy information Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can be rectified quickly: • On the home page Remedy information is displayed in a separate field below the diagnostics information. • In the Diagnostics menu Remedy information can be called up in the working area of the user interface. 160 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Diagnostics and troubleshooting The user is in the Diagnostics menu. 1. Call up the desired parameter. 2. On the right in the working area, mouse over the parameter. A tool tip with remedy information for the diagnostic event appears. 12.6 Diagnostic information via communication interface 12.6.1 Reading out diagnostic information Diagnostic information can be read out via Modbus RS485 register addresses. • Via register address 6821 (data type = string): diagnosis code, e.g. F270 • Via register address 6859 (data type = integer): diagnosis number, e.g. 270 For an overview of diagnostic events with diagnosis number and diagnosis code → 162 12.6.2 Configuring error response mode The error response mode for Modbus RS485 communication can be configured in the Communication submenu using 2 parameters. Navigation path Setup → Communication Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Failure mode Description Options Factory setting Select measured value • NaN value NaN value output behavior when a • Last valid value diagnostic message occurs NaN º not a number via Modbus communication. effect of this The parameter depends on the option selected in the Assign diagnostic behavior parameter. 12.7 Adapting the diagnostic information 12.7.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific diagnostic behavior at the factory. The user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the Diagnostic behavior submenu. Expert → System → Diagnostic handling → Diagnostic behavior You can assign the following options to the diagnostic number as the diagnostic behavior: Endress+Hauser Options Description Alarm The device stops measurement. The measured value output via Modbus RS485 and the totalizers assume the defined alarm condition. A diagnostic message is generated. The background lighting changes to red. Warning The device continues to measure. The measured value output via Modbus RS485 and the totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic message is generated. 161 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Options Description Logbook entry only The device continues to measure. The diagnostic message is only displayed in the Event logbook submenu (Event list submenu) and is not displayed in alternating sequence with the operational display. Off The diagnostic event is ignored, and no diagnostic message is generated or entered. 12.8 Overview of diagnostic information The amount of diagnostic information and the number of measured variables affected increase if the measuring device has one or more application packages. In the case of some items of diagnostic information, the diagnostic behavior can be changed. Adapting the diagnostic information → 161 Diagnostic number Short text Remedy instructions Status signal [from the factory] Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] Diagnostic of sensor 043 Sensor 1 short circuit detected 1. Check sensor cable and sensor 2. Execute Heartbeat Verification 3. Replace sensor cable or sensor S Warning 1) 082 Data storage inconsistent Check module connections F Alarm 083 Memory content inconsistent 1. Restart device 2. Restore S-DAT data 3. Replace S-DAT F Alarm 143 HBSI limit exceeded 1. Check if external magnetic interference is present 2. Check flow value 3. Replace sensor M Warning 1) 168 Build-up limit exceeded Clean measuring tube M Warning 169 Conductivity measurement failed 1. Check grounding conditions 2. Deactivate conductivity measurement M Warning 170 Coil resistance faulty Check ambient and process temperature F Alarm 180 Temperature sensor defective 1. Check sensor connections 2. Replace sensor cable or sensor 3. Turn off temperature measurement F Warning 181 Sensor connection faulty 1. Check sensor cable and sensor 2. Execute Heartbeat Verification 3. Replace sensor cable or sensor F Alarm Diagnostic of electronic 162 201 Electronics faulty 1. Restart device 2. Replace electronics F Alarm 242 Firmware incompatible 1. Check firmware version 2. Flash or replace electronic module F Alarm 252 Module incompatible 1. Check electronic modules 2. Check if correct modules are available (e.g. NEx, Ex) 3. Replace electronic modules F Alarm 262 Module connection interrupted 1. Check module connections 2. Replace electronic modules F Alarm 270 Main electronics defective 1. Restart device 2. Replace main electronic module F Alarm Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Endress+Hauser Diagnostics and troubleshooting Diagnostic number Short text 271 Main electronics faulty 272 Remedy instructions Status signal [from the factory] Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] 1. Restart device 2. Replace main electronic module F Alarm Main electronics faulty Restart device F Alarm 273 Main electronics defective 1. Pay attention to display emergency operation 2. Replace main electronics F Alarm 276 I/O module faulty 1. Restart device 2. Change I/O module F Alarm 283 Memory content inconsistent Restart device F Alarm 302 Device verification active Device verification active, please wait. C Warning 1) 303 I/O 1 to n configuration changed 1. Apply I/O module configuration M (parameter 'Apply I/O configuration') 2. Afterwards reload device description and check wiring Warning 311 Sensor electronics (ISEM) faulty Maintenance required! Do not reset device M Warning 330 Flash file invalid 1. Update firmware of device 2. Restart device M Warning 331 Firmware update failed 1. Update firmware of device 2. Restart device F Warning 332 Writing in HistoROM backup failed 1. Replace user interface board 2. Ex d/XP: replace transmitter F Alarm 361 I/O module 1 to n faulty 1. Restart device 2. Check electronic modules 3. Change I/O module or main electronics F Alarm 372 Sensor electronics (ISEM) faulty 1. Restart device 2. Check if failure recurs 3. Replace sensor electronic module (ISEM) F Alarm 373 Sensor electronics (ISEM) faulty Transfer data or reset device F Alarm 375 I/O- 1 to n communication failed 1. Restart device 2. Check if failure recurs 3. Replace module rack inclusive electronic modules F Alarm 376 Sensor electronics (ISEM) faulty 1. Replace sensor electronic module (ISEM) 2. Turn off diagnostic message S Warning 1) 377 Electrode signal faulty 1. Activate empty pipe detection 2. Check partial filled pipe and installation direction 3. Check sensor cabling 4. Deactivate diagnostics 377 S Warning 1) 378 Supply voltage ISEM faulty 1. If available: Check connection cable between sensor and transmitter 2. Replace main electronic module 3. Replace sensor electronic module (ISEM) F Alarm 382 Data storage 1. Insert T-DAT 2. Replace T-DAT F Alarm 383 Memory content Reset device F Alarm 163 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Diagnostic number Short text 387 HistoROM data faulty Remedy instructions Status signal [from the factory] Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] Contact service organization F Alarm Diagnostic of configuration 164 410 Data transfer failed 1. Retry data transfer 2. Check connection F Alarm 412 Processing download Download active, please wait C Warning 431 Trim 1 to n required Carry out trim C Warning 437 Configuration incompatible 1. Update firmware 2. Execute factory reset F Alarm 438 Dataset different 1. Check data set file 2. Check device parameterization 3. Download new device parameterization M Warning 441 Current output faulty 1. Check process 2. Check current output settings S Warning 1) 442 Frequency output faulty 1. Check process 2. Check frequency output settings S Warning 1) 443 Pulse output 1 to n faulty 1. Check process 2. Check pulse output settings S Warning 1) 444 Current input 1 to n faulty 1. Check process 2. Check current input settings S Warning 1) 453 Flow override active Deactivate flow override C Warning 484 Failure mode simulation Deactivate simulation active C Alarm 485 Process variable simulation active Deactivate simulation C Warning 486 Current input simulation Deactivate simulation active C Warning 491 Current output 1 to n simulation active Deactivate simulation C Warning 492 Frequency output simulation active Deactivate simulation frequency output C Warning 493 Pulse output simulation active Deactivate simulation pulse output C Warning 494 Switch output simulation active Deactivate simulation switch output C Warning 495 Diagnostic event simulation active Deactivate simulation C Warning 496 Status input simulation active Deactivate simulation status input C Warning 502 CT activation/ deactivation failed Follow the sequence of the custody transfer activation/deactivation: First authorized user login, then set the DIP switch on the main electonic module C Warning 511 Sensor setting error 1. Check measuring period and integration time 2. Check sensor properties C Alarm 512 ECC recovery time exceeded 1. Check ECC recovery time 2. Turn off ECC F Alarm Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Diagnostic number Short text Remedy instructions 1. Check I/O hardware configuration 2. Replace wrong I/O module 3. Plug the module of double pulse output on correct slot Status signal [from the factory] Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] F Alarm 520 I/O 1 to n hardware configuration invalid 530 Electrode cleaning active Switch off electrode cleaning C Warning 531 Empty pipe adjustment faulty Execute EPD adjustment S Warning 1) 537 Configuration 1. Check IP addresses in network 2. Change IP address F Warning 540 Custody transfer mode failed 1. Power off device and toggle DIP switch 2. Deactivate custody transfer mode 3. Reactivate custody transfer mode 4. Check electronic components F Alarm 543 Double pulse output 1. Check process 2. Check pulse output settings S Warning 593 Double pulse output simulation Deactivate simulation pulse output C Warning 594 Relay output simulation Deactivate simulation switch output C Warning 599 Custody transfer logbook full 1. Deactivate custody transfer mode 2. Clear custody transfer logbook (all 30 entries) 3. Activate custody transfer mode S Warning Diagnostic of process 1) Endress+Hauser 803 Loop current 1 faulty 1. Check wiring 2. Change I/O module F Alarm 832 Electronics temperature too high Reduce ambient temperature S Warning 1) 833 Electronics temperature too low Increase ambient temperature S Warning 1) 834 Process temperature too high Reduce process temperature S Warning 1) 835 Process temperature too low Increase process temperature S Warning 1) 842 Process value below limit Low flow cut off active! Check low flow cut off configuration S Warning 1) 882 Input signal faulty 1. Check input signal parameterization F 2. Check external device 3. Check process conditions Alarm 937 Sensor symmetry 1. Eliminate external magnetic field near sensor 2. Turn off diagnostic message S Warning 1) 938 Coil current not stable 1. Check if external magnetic interference is present 2. Perform Heartbeat Verification 3. Check flow value F Alarm 1) 961 Electrode potential out of specification 1. Check process conditions 2. Check ambient conditions S Warning 1) 962 Pipe empty 1. Perform full pipe adjustment 2. Perform empty pipe adjustment 3. Turn off empty pipe detection S Warning 1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed. 165 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 12.9 Pending diagnostic events The Diagnostics menu allows the user to view the current diagnostic event and the previous diagnostic event separately. To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event: • Via local display → 158 • Via web browser → 159 • Via "FieldCare" operating tool → 160 • Via "DeviceCare" operating tool → 160 Other pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu → 166. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Diagnostics Actual diagnostics → 166 Previous diagnostics → 166 Operating time from restart → 166 Operating time → 166 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Actual diagnostics Prerequisite A diagnostic event has occurred. Description User interface Shows the current occured diagnostic event along with its diagnostic information. Symbol for diagnostic behavior, diagnostic code and short message. two or more messages occur Ifsimultaneously, the message with the highest priority is shown on the display. Previous diagnostics Two diagnostic events have already occurred. Shows the diagnostic event that occurred prior to the current diagnostic event along with its diagnostic information. Symbol for diagnostic behavior, diagnostic code and short message. Operating time from restart – Shows the time the device has been in operation since the last device restart. Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds (s) Operating time – Indicates how long the device has been in operation. Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds (s) 12.10 Diagnostics list Up to 5 currently pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu along with the associated diagnostic information. If more than 5 diagnostic events are pending, the events with the highest priority are shown on the display. Navigation path Diagnostics → Diagnostic list 166 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Diagnostics and troubleshooting / ../Diagnose list Diagnostics F273 Main electronic Diagnostics 2 Diagnostics 3 A0014006-EN 39 Using the example of the local display To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event: • Via local display → 158 • Via web browser → 159 • Via "FieldCare" operating tool → 160 • Via "DeviceCare" operating tool → 160 12.11 Event logbook 12.11.1 Reading out the event logbook A chronological overview of the event messages that have occurred is provided in the Events list submenu. Navigation path Diagnostics menu → Event logbook submenu → Events list / ../Eventlist F I1091 Config. change I1157 Mem.err. ev.list 0d01h19m10s F311 Electr. failure A0014008-EN 40 Using the example of the local display • A maximum of 20 event messages can be displayed in chronological order. • If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled in the device, the event list can contain up to 100 entries. The event history includes entries for: • Diagnostic events → 162 • Information events → 168 In addition to the operating time when the event occurred, each event is also assigned a symbol that indicates whether the event has occurred or is finished: • Diagnostics event • : Occurrence of the event • : End of the event • Information event : Occurrence of the event To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event: • Via local display → 158 • Via web browser → 159 • Via "FieldCare" operating tool → 160 • Via "DeviceCare" operating tool → 160 For filtering the displayed event messages → 168 Endress+Hauser 167 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 12.11.2 Filtering the event logbook Using the Filter options parameter you can define which category of event message is displayed in the Events list submenu. Navigation path Diagnostics → Event logbook → Filter options Filter categories • All • Failure (F) • Function check (C) • Out of specification (S) • Maintenance required (M) • Information (I) 12.11.3 Overview of information events Unlike a diagnostic event, an information event is displayed in the event logbook only and not in the diagnostic list. Info number 168 Info name I1000 --------(Device ok) I1079 Sensor changed I1089 Power on I1090 Configuration reset I1091 Configuration changed I1092 HistoROM backup deleted I1137 Electronics changed I1151 History reset I1155 Reset electronics temperature I1156 Memory error trend I1157 Memory error event list I1256 Display: access status changed I1278 I/O module restarted I1335 Firmware changed I1351 Empty pipe detection adjustment failure I1353 Empty pipe detection adjustment ok I1361 Web server: login failed I1397 Fieldbus: access status changed I1398 CDI: access status changed I1443 Build-up thickness not determined I1444 Device verification passed I1445 Device verification failed I1457 Measurement error verification failed I1459 I/O module verification failed I1461 Sensor verification failed I1462 Sensor electronic module verific. failed I1512 Download started I1513 Download finished Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Info number Info name I1514 Upload started I1515 Upload finished I1517 Custody transfer active I1518 Custody transfer inactive I1618 I/O module 2 replaced I1619 I/O module 3 replaced I1621 I/O module 4 replaced I1622 Calibration changed I1624 All totalizers reset I1625 Write protection activated I1626 Write protection deactivated I1627 Web server: login successful I1628 Display: login successful I1629 CDI: login successful I1631 Web server access changed I1632 Display: login failed I1633 CDI: login failed I1634 Reset to factory settings I1635 Reset to delivery settings I1639 Max. switch cycles number reached I1643 Custody transfer logbook cleared I1649 Hardware write protection activated I1650 Hardware write protection deactivated I1651 Custody transfer parameter changed I1712 New flash file received I1725 Sensor electronic module (ISEM) changed I1726 Configuration backup failed 12.12 Resetting the measuring device The entire device configuration or some of the configuration can be reset to a defined state with the Device reset parameter (→ 136). 12.12.1 Function range of "Device reset" parameter Endress+Hauser Options Description Cancel No action is executed and the user exits the parameter. To delivery settings Every parameter for which a customer-specific default setting was ordered is reset to the customer-specific value. All other parameters are reset to the factory setting. 169 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Options Description Restart device The restart resets every parameter with data stored in volatile memory (RAM) to the factory setting (e.g. measured value data). The device configuration remains unchanged. Restore S-DAT backup Restores the data that is saved on the S-DAT. Additional information: This function can be used to resolve the memory issue "083 Memory content inconsistent" or to restore the S-DAT data when a new S-DAT has been installed. This option is displayed only in an alarm condition. 12.13 Device information The Device information submenu contains all parameters that display different information for device identification. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu → Device information ‣ Device information Device tag → 170 Serial number → 170 Firmware version → 170 Device name → 171 Order code → 171 Extended order code 1 → 171 Extended order code 2 → 171 Extended order code 3 → 171 ENP version → 171 Parameter overview with brief description Parameter Description User interface Factory setting Device tag Shows name of measuring point. Max. 32 characters, such as letters, numbers or special characters (e.g. @, %, /). Promag Serial number Shows the serial number of the measuring device. Max. 11-digit character string comprising letters and numbers. – Firmware version Shows the device firmware version installed. Character string in the format xx.yy.zz – 170 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Parameter Device name Diagnostics and troubleshooting Description User interface Shows the name of the transmitter. Factory setting Promag 300/500 – Character string composed of letters, numbers and certain punctuation marks (e.g. /). – Character string – Character string – Character string – Character string 2.02.00 name can be found on the The nameplate of the transmitter. Order code Shows the device order code. The order code can be found on the nameplate of the sensor and transmitter in the "Order code" field. Extended order code 1 Shows the 1st part of the extended order code. extended order code can also be The found on the nameplate of the sensor and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd." field. Extended order code 2 Shows the 2nd part of the extended order code. extended order code can also be The found on the nameplate of the sensor and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd." field. Extended order code 3 Shows the 3rd part of the extended order code. extended order code can also be The found on the nameplate of the sensor and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd." field. ENP version Shows the version of the electronic nameplate (ENP). 12.14 Firmware history Release date Endress+Hauser Firmware version Order code for "Firmware version" Firmware Changes Documentation type Documentation 08.2022 01.06.zz Option 58 • HBSI (Heartbeat Technology) • Build-up index (Heartbeat Technology) • Configuring flow damping Operating Instructions BA01401D/06/EN/05.22 08.2019 01.05.zz Option 63 Various improvements Operating Instructions BA01401D/06/EN/03.19 171 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Release date Firmware version Order code for "Firmware version" Firmware Changes Documentation type Documentation 10.2017 01.01.zz Option 67 • Local display Operating enhanced Instructions performance and data entry via text editor • Optimized keypad lock for local display • Web server feature update • Support for trend data function • Heartbeat function enhanced to include detailed results (page 3/4 of the report) • Device configuration as PDF (parameter log, similar to FDT print) • Network capability of Ethernet (service) interface • Comprehensive Heartbeat feature update • Local display support for WLAN infrastructure mode • Implementation of reset code BA01401D/06/EN/02.17 08.2016 01.00.zz Option 74 Original firmware BA01401D/06/EN/01.16 Operating Instructions It is possible to flash the firmware to the current version or the previous version using the service interface. For the compatibility of the firmware version, see the "Device history and compatibility" section → 172 For the compatibility of the firmware version with the previous version, the installed device description files and operating tools, observe the information about the device in the "Manufacturer's information" document. The manufacturer's information is available: • In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser web site: www.endress.com → Downloads • Specify the following details: • Product root: e.g. 5H5B The product root is the first part of the order code: see the nameplate on the device. • Text search: Manufacturer's information • Media type: Documentation – Technical Documentation 12.15 Device history and compatibility The device model is documented in the order code on the nameplate of the device (e.g. 8F3BXX-XXX....XXXA1-XXXXXX). 172 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Endress+Hauser Diagnostics and troubleshooting Device model Release Change compared with earlier model Compatibility with earlier model A2 09.2019 I/O module with enhanced performance and functionality: see device firmware 01.05.zz → 171 No A1 10.2017 – – 173 Maintenance Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 13 Maintenance 13.1 Maintenance work No special maintenance work is required. 13.1.1 Exterior cleaning When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do not attack the surface of the housing or the gaskets. 13.1.2 Interior cleaning Cleaning with pigs It is essential to take the internal diameters of the measuring tube and process connection into account when cleaning with pigs. All the dimensions and lengths of the sensor and transmitter are provided in the separate "Technical Information" document. 13.1.3 Replacing seals The sensor's seals (particularly aseptic molded seals) must be replaced periodically. The interval between changes depends on the frequency of the cleaning cycles, the cleaning temperature and the medium temperature. Replacement seals (accessory part) → 207 13.2 Measuring and test equipment Endress+Hauser offers a variety of measuring and testing equipment, such as Netilion or device tests. Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services. List of some of the measuring and testing equipment: → 179 13.3 Endress+Hauser services Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of services for maintenance such as recalibration, maintenance service or device tests. Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services. 174 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Repair 14 Repair 14.1 General notes 14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept The Endress+Hauser repair and conversion concept provides for the following: • The measuring devices have a modular design. • Spare parts are grouped into logical kits with the associated Installation Instructions. • Repairs are carried out by Endress+Hauser Service or by appropriately trained customers. • Certified devices can only be converted to other certified devices by Endress+Hauser Service or at the factory. 14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion For repair and conversion of a measuring device, observe the following notes: ‣ Use only original Endress+Hauser spare parts. ‣ Carry out the repair according to the Installation Instructions. ‣ Observe the applicable standards, federal/national regulations, Ex documentation (XA) and certificates. ‣ Document all repairs and conversions and enter the details in Netilion Analytics. 14.2 Spare parts Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): All the spare parts for the measuring device, along with the order code, are listed here and can be ordered. If available, users can also download the associated Installation Instructions. Measuring device serial number: • Is located on the nameplate of the device. • Can be read out via the Serial number parameter (→ 170) in the Device information submenu. 14.3 Endress+Hauser services Endress+Hauser offers a wide range of services. Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services. 14.4 Return The requirements for safe device return can vary depending on the device type and national legislation. Endress+Hauser 1. Refer to the web page for information: https://www.endress.com/support/return-material Select the region. 2. If returning the device, pack the device in such a way that it is reliably protected against impact and external influences. The original packaging offers the best protection. 175 Repair Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 14.5 Disposal If required by the Directive 2012/19/EU on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE), the product is marked with the depicted symbol in order to minimize the disposal of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste. Do not dispose of products bearing this marking as unsorted municipal waste. Instead, return them to the manufacturer for disposal under the applicable conditions. 14.5.1 1. Removing the measuring device Switch off the device. LWARNING Danger to persons from process conditions! ‣ Beware of hazardous process conditions such as pressure in the measuring device, high temperatures or aggressive media. 2. Carry out the mounting and connection steps from the "Mounting the measuring device" and "Connecting the measuring device" sections in reverse order. Observe the safety instructions. 14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device LWARNING Danger to personnel and environment from fluids that are hazardous to health. ‣ Ensure that the measuring device and all cavities are free of fluid residues that are hazardous to health or the environment, e.g. substances that have permeated into crevices or diffused through plastic. Observe the following notes during disposal: ‣ Observe valid federal/national regulations. ‣ Ensure proper separation and reuse of the device components. 176 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 15 Accessories Accessories Various accessories, which can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress +Hauser, are available for the device. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com. 15.1 Device-specific accessories 15.1.1 For the transmitter Accessories Description Transmitter • Proline 500 – digital • Proline 500 Transmitter for replacement or storage. Use the order code to define the following specifications: • Approvals • Output • Input • Display/operation • Housing • Software Proline 500 – digital transmitter: • Order number: 5X5BXX-*********A • Proline 500 transmitter: Order number: 5X5BXX-*********B 500 transmitter for replacement: Proline It is essential to specify the serial number of the current transmitter when ordering. On the basis of the serial number, the device-specific data (e.g. calibration factors) of the replaced device can be used for the new transmitter. 500 – digital transmitter: Installation Instructions EA01151D •• Proline Proline 500 transmitter: Installation Instructions EA01152D External WLAN antenna External WLAN antenna with 1.5 m (59.1 in) connecting cable and two angle brackets. Order code for "Accessory enclosed", option P8 "Wireless antenna wide area". The external WLAN antenna is not suitable for use in hygienic • applications. • Additional information regarding the WLAN interface → 88. Installation Instructions EA01238D Order number: 71351317 Pipe mounting set Pipe mounting set for transmitter. 500 – digital transmitter Proline Order number: 71346427 Installation Instructions EA01195D 500 transmitter Proline Order number: 71346428 Weather protection cover Transmitter • Proline 500 – digital • Proline 500 Is used to protect the measuring device from the effects of the weather: e.g. rainwater, excess heating from direct sunlight. 500 – digital transmitter • Proline Order number: 71343504 • Proline 500 transmitter Order number: 71343505 Installation Instructions EA01191D Endress+Hauser 177 Accessories Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Display guard Proline 500 – digital Is used to protect the display against impact or scoring, for example from sand in desert areas. Order number: 71228792 Installation Instructions EA01093D Connecting cable Proline 500 – digital Sensor – Transmitter The connecting cable can be ordered directly with the measuring device (order code for "Cable, sensor connection) or as an accessory (order number DK5012). The following cable lengths are available: order code for "Cable, sensor connection" • Option B: 20 m (65 ft) • Option E: User-configurable up to max. 50 m • Option F: User-configurable up to max. 165 ft possible cable length for a Proline 500 – digital connecting cable: Maximum 300 m (1 000 ft) Connecting cables Proline 500 Sensor – Transmitter The connecting cable can be ordered directly with the measuring device (order code for "Cable, sensor connection") or as an accessory (order number DK5012). The following cable lengths are available: order code for "Cable, sensor connection" • Option 1: 5 m (16 ft) • Option 2: 10 m (32 ft) • Option 3: 20 m (65 ft) • Option 4: User-configurable cable length (m) • Option 5: User-configurable cable length (ft) cable length for a Proline 500 connecting cable: depending on the Possible medium conductivity, max. 200 m (660 ft) 15.1.2 For the sensor Accessories Description Adapter set Adapter connections for installing a Promag H instead of a Promag 30/33 A or Promag 30/33 H (DN 25). Consists of: • 2 process connections • Screws • Seals Seal set For the regular replacement of seals for the sensor. Spacer If replacing a DN 80/100 sensor in an existing installation, a spacer is needed if the new sensor is shorter. Welding jig Welding socket as process connection: welding jig for installation in pipe. Grounding rings Are used to ground the medium in lined measuring tubes to ensure proper measurement. rings can be ordered via the device order structure or configured Grounding and ordered as an accessory via the DK5HR order structure. Ground disks Are used to ground the medium in lined measuring tubes to ensure proper measurement. For details, see Installation Instructions EA00070D 178 Mounting kit Consists of: • 2 process connections • Screws • Seals Wall mounting kit Wall mounting kit for measuring device (only DN 2 to 25 (1/12 to 1")) Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 15.2 Accessories Service-specific accessories Accessories Description Applicator Software for selecting and sizing Endress+Hauser measuring devices: • Choice of measuring devices for industrial requirements • Calculation of all the necessary data for identifying the optimum flowmeter: e.g. nominal diameter, pressure loss, flow velocity and accuracy. • Graphic illustration of the calculation results • Determination of the partial order code, administration, documentation and access to all project-related data and parameters over the entire life cycle of a project. Applicator is available: • Via the Internet: https://portal.endress.com/webapp/applicator • As a downloadable DVD for local PC installation. Netilion lloT ecosystem: Unlock knowledge Endress+Hauser 's Netilion lloT ecosystem enables you to optimize your plant performance, digitize workflows, share knowledge and improve collaboration. Based on decades of experience in process automation, Endress+Hauser offers the process industry an lloT ecosystem that enables you to gain useful insights from data. This knowledge can be used to optimize processes, leading to higher plant availability, efficiency and reliability, and ultimately to a more profitable plant. www.netilion.endress.com FieldCare FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser. It can configure all smart field units in your system and helps you manage them. By using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition. Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S DeviceCare Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices. Innovation brochure IN01047S 15.3 System components Accessories Description Memograph M graphic data manager The Memograph M graphic data manager provides information on all the relevant measured variables. Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values are monitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256 MB internal memory and also on a SD card or USB stick. Information TI00133R •• Technical Operating Instructions BA00247R iTEMP The temperature transmitters can be used in all applications and are suitable for the measurement of gases, steam and liquids. They can be used to read in the medium temperature. "Fields of Activity" document FA00006T Endress+Hauser 179 Technical data Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 16 Technical data 16.1 Application The measuring device is intended only for the flow measurement of liquids with a minimum conductivity of 5 µS/cm. Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentially explosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media. To ensure that the device remains in proper operating condition for its service life, use the measuring device only for media against which the process-wetted materials are sufficiently resistant. 16.2 Function and system design Measuring principle Electromagnetic flow measurement on the basis of Faraday's law of magnetic induction. Measuring system The measuring system consists of a transmitter and a sensor. The transmitter and sensor are mounted in physically separate locations. They are interconnected by connecting cables. For information on the structure of the measuring instrument → 13 16.3 Measured variable Input Direct measured variables • Volume flow (proportional to induced voltage) • Temperature 2) • Electrical conductivity Calculated measured variables • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Corrected electrical conductivity 2) Measuring range Typically v = 0.01 to 10 m/s (0.03 to 33 ft/s) with the specified accuracy Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 2 to 125 (¹⁄₁₂ to 5") Nominal diameter 2) 180 Recommended flow Factory settings min./max. full scale value (v ~ 0.3/10 m/s) Full scale value current output (v ~ 2.5 m/s) Pulse value (~ 2 pulse/s) Low flow cut off (v ~ 0.04 m/s) [mm] [in] [dm3/min] [dm3/min] [dm3] [dm3/min] 2 ¹⁄₁₂ 0.06 to 1.8 0.5 0.005 0.01 4 ⁵⁄₃₂ 0.25 to 7 2 0.025 0.05 Available only for nominal diameters DN 15 to 150 (½ to 6") and with the order code for "Sensor option", option CI "Medium temperature measurement". Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data Nominal diameter Recommended flow Factory settings min./max. full scale value (v ~ 0.3/10 m/s) Full scale value current output (v ~ 2.5 m/s) Pulse value (~ 2 pulse/s) Low flow cut off (v ~ 0.04 m/s) [mm] [in] [dm3/min] [dm3/min] [dm3] [dm3/min] 8 ⁵⁄₁₆ 1 to 30 8 0.1 0.1 15 ½ 4 to 100 25 0.2 0.5 1) 1 9 to 300 75 0.5 1 40 1½ 25 to 700 200 1.5 3 50 2 35 to 1 100 300 2.5 5 65 – 60 to 2 000 500 5 8 80 3 90 to 3 000 750 5 12 100 4 145 to 4 700 1200 10 20 125 5 220 to 7 500 1850 15 30 25 1) The values apply for the product version: 5HxB26 Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 150 (6") Nominal diameter Recommended flow Factory settings min./max. full scale value (v ~ 0.3/10 m/s) Full scale value current output (v ~ 2.5 m/s) Pulse value (~ 2 pulse/s) Low flow cut off (v ~ 0.04 m/s) [mm] [in] [m3/h] [m3/h] [m3] [m3/h] 150 6 20 to 600 150 0.03 2.5 Flow characteristic values in US units: ¹⁄₁₂ - 6" (DN 2 - 150) Nominal diameter Factory settings min./max. full scale value (v ~ 0.3/10 m/s) Full scale value current output (v ~ 2.5 m/s) Pulse value (~ 2 pulse/s) Low flow cut off (v ~ 0.04 m/s ) [in] [mm] [gal/min] [gal/min] [gal] [gal/ min] ¹⁄₁₂ 2 0.015 to 0.5 0.1 0.001 0.002 ¹⁄₃₂ 4 0.07 to 2 0.5 0.005 0.008 ⁵⁄₁₆ 8 0.25 to 8 2 0.02 0.025 ½ 15 1 to 27 6 0.05 0.1 1) 25 2.5 to 80 18 0.2 0.25 1½ 40 7 to 190 50 0.5 0.75 2 50 10 to 300 75 0.5 1.25 3 80 24 to 800 200 2 2.5 4 100 40 to 1 250 300 2 4 1 Endress+Hauser Recommended flow 181 Technical data Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Nominal diameter 1) Recommended flow Factory settings min./max. full scale value (v ~ 0.3/10 m/s) Full scale value current output (v ~ 2.5 m/s) Pulse value (~ 2 pulse/s) Low flow cut off (v ~ 0.04 m/s ) [in] [mm] [gal/min] [gal/min] [gal] [gal/ min] 5 125 60 to 1 950 450 5 7 6 150 90 to 2 650 600 5 12 The values apply for the product version: 5HxB26 Recommended measuring range Flow limit → 196 For custody transfer, the applicable approval determines the permitted measuring range, the pulse value and the low flow cut off. Operable flow range Over 1000 : 1 For custody transfer, the operable flow range is 100 : 1 to 630 : 1, depending on the nominal diameter. Further details are specified by the applicable approval. Input signal External measured values To increase the measurement accuracy of certain measured variables or to calculate the mass flow, the automation system can continuously write different measured values to the measuring instrument: • Medium temperature enables temperature-compensated conductivity measurement (e.g. iTEMP) • Reference density for calculating the mass flow Various pressure and temperature measuring devices can be ordered from Endress +Hauser: see "Accessories" section → 179 It is recommended to read in external measured values to calculate the corrected volume flow. Current input The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via the current input → 182. Digital communication The measured values are written by the automation system via Modbus RS485. Current input 0/4 to 20 mA 182 Current input 0/4 to 20 mA (active/passive) Current span • 4 to 20 mA (active) • 0/4 to 20 mA (passive) Resolution 1 µA Voltage drop Typically: 0.6 to 2 V for 3.6 to 22 mA (passive) Maximum input voltage ≤ 30 V (passive) Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data Open-circuit voltage ≤ 28.8 V (active) Possible input variables • Temperature • Density Status input Endress+Hauser Maximum input values • DC –3 to 30 V • If status input is active (ON): Ri >3 kΩ Response time Configurable: 5 to 200 ms Input signal level • Low signal: DC –3 to +5 V • High signal: DC 12 to 30 V Assignable functions • Off • Reset the individual totalizers separately • Reset all totalizers • Flow override 183 Technical data Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 16.4 Output signal Output Modbus RS485 Physical interface RS485 in accordance with EIA/TIA-485 standard Terminating resistor Integrated, can be activated via DIP switches Current output 4 to 20 mA Signal mode Can be set to: • Active • Passive Current range Can be set to: • 4 to 20 mA NAMUR • 4 to 20 mA US • 4 to 20 mA • 0 to 20 mA (only if the signal mode is active) • Fixed current Maximum output values 22.5 mA Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active) Maximum input voltage DC 30 V (passive) Load 0 to 700 Ω Resolution 0.38 µA Damping Configurable: 0 to 999.9 s Assignable measured variables • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Flow velocity • Conductivity • Corrected conductivity • Temperature • Electronics temperature Pulse/frequency/switch output Function Can be configured as pulse, frequency or switch output Version Open collector Can be set to: • Active • Passive • Passive NAMUR Ex-i, passive Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive) Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active) Voltage drop For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V Pulse output 184 Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive) Maximum output current 22.5 mA (active) Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active) Pulse width Configurable: 0.05 to 2 000 ms Maximum pulse rate 10 000 Impulse/s Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data Pulse value Configurable Assignable measured variables • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow Frequency output Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive) Maximum output current 22.5 mA (active) Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active) Output frequency Configurable: end value frequency 2 to 10 000 Hz(f max = 12 500 Hz) Damping Configurable: 0 to 999.9 s Pulse/pause ratio 1:1 Assignable measured variables • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Flow velocity • Conductivity • Corrected conductivity • Temperature • Electronics temperature Switch output Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive) Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active) Switching behavior Binary, conductive or non-conductive Switching delay Configurable: 0 to 100 s Number of switching cycles Unlimited Assignable functions • Disable • On • Diagnostic behavior • Limit value: • Disable • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Flow velocity • Conductivity • Corrected conductivity • Totalizer 1-3 • Temperature • Electronics temperature • Flow direction monitoring • Status • Empty pipe detection • Buildup index • HBSI limit value exceeded • Low flow cut off Double pulse output Function Double pulse Version Open collector Can be set to: • Active • Passive • Passive NAMUR Maximum input values Endress+Hauser DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive) 185 Technical data Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active) Voltage drop For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V Output frequency Configurable: 0 to 1 000 Hz Damping Configurable: 0 to 999 s Pulse/pause ratio 1:1 Assignable measured variables • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Flow velocity • Conductivity • Corrected conductivity • Temperature • Electronics temperature Relay output Function Switch output Version Relay output, galvanically isolated Switching behavior Can be set to: • NO (normally open), factory setting • NC (normally closed) Maximum switching capacity (passive) • DC 30 V, 0.1 A • AC 30 V, 0.5 A Assignable functions • Disable • On • Diagnostic behavior • Limit value: • Disable • Volume flow • Mass flow • Corrected volume flow • Flow velocity • Conductivity • Corrected conductivity • Totalizer 1-3 • Temperature • Electronics temperature • Flow direction monitoring • Status • Empty pipe detection • Buildup index • HBSI limit value exceeded • Low flow cut off User-configurable input/output One specific input or output is assigned to a user-configurable input/output (configurable I/O) during device commissioning. The following inputs and outputs are available for assignment: • Choice of current output: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive) • Pulse/frequency/switch output • Choice of current input: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive) • Status input Signal on alarm 186 Depending on the interface, failure information is displayed as follows: Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data Modbus RS485 Failure mode Choose from: • NaN value instead of current value • Last valid value Current output 0/4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Failure mode Choose from: • 4 to 20 mA in accordance with NAMUR recommendation NE 43 • 4 to 20 mA in accordance with US • Min. value: 3.59 mA • Max. value: 22.5 mA • Definable value between: 3.59 to 22.5 mA • Actual value • Last valid value 0 to 20 mA Failure mode Choose from: • Maximum alarm: 22 mA • Definable value between: 0 to 20.5 mA Pulse/frequency/switch output Pulse output Fault mode Choose from: • Actual value • No pulses Frequency output Fault mode Choose from: • Actual value • 0 Hz • Definable value between: 2 to 12 500 Hz Switch output Fault mode Choose from: • Current status • Open • Closed Relay output Failure mode Choose from: • Current status • Open • Closed Local display Plain text display With information on cause and remedial measures Backlight Red lighting indicates a device error. Status signal as per NAMUR recommendation NE 107 Endress+Hauser 187 Technical data Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Interface/protocol • Via digital communication: Modbus RS485 • Via service interface • CDI-RJ45 service interface • WLAN interface Plain text display With information on cause and remedial measures Web browser Plain text display With information on cause and remedial measures Light emitting diodes (LED) Status information Status indicated by various light emitting diodes The following information is displayed depending on the device version: • Supply voltage active • Data transmission active • Device alarm/error has occurred Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes → 153 Low flow cut off The switch points for low flow cut off are user-selectable. Galvanic isolation The outputs are galvanically isolated: • from the power supply • from one another • from the potential equalization (PE) terminal Protocol-specific data Protocol Modbus Applications Protocol Specification V1.1 Response times • Direct data access: typically 25 to 50 ms • Auto-scan buffer (data range): typically 3 to 5 ms Device type Slave Slave address range 1 to 247 Broadcast address range 0 Function codes • 03: Read holding register • 04: Read input register • 06: Write single registers • 08: Diagnostics • 16: Write multiple registers • 23: Read/write multiple registers Broadcast messages Supported by the following function codes: • 06: Write single registers • 16: Write multiple registers • 23: Read/write multiple registers Supported baud rate • 1 200 BAUD • 2 400 BAUD • 4 800 BAUD • 9 600 BAUD • 19 200 BAUD • 38 400 BAUD • 57 600 BAUD • 115 200 BAUD 188 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data Data transmission mode • ASCII • RTU Data access Each device parameter can be accessed via Modbus RS485. For Modbus register information Compatibility with earlier model If the device is replaced, the measuring device Promag 500 supports the compatibility of the Modbus registers for the process variables and the diagnostic information with the previous model Promag 53. It is not necessary to change the engineering parameters in the automation system. System integration Information regarding system integration → 93. • Modbus RS485 information • Function codes • Register information • Response time • Modbus data map 16.5 Power supply Terminal assignment → 40 Supply voltage Order code "Power supply" Terminal voltage Option D DC 24 V Option E AC 100 to 240 V –15…+10% 50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz DC 24 V – Option I Power consumption Frequency range ±20% ±20% AC 100 to 240 V –15…+10% – 50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz Transmitter Max. 10 W (active power) switch-on current Current consumption Max. 36 A (<5 ms) as per NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 Transmitter • Max. 400 mA (24 V) • Max. 200 mA (110 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V, 50/60 Hz) Power supply failure • Totalizers stop at the last value measured. • Depending on the device version, the configuration is retained in the device memory or in the pluggable data memory (HistoROM DAT). • Error messages (incl. total operated hours) are stored. Overcurrent protection element The device must be operated with a dedicated circuit breaker, as it does not have an ON/OFF switch of its own. • The circuit breaker must be easy to reach and labeled accordingly. • Permitted nominal current of the circuit breaker: 2 A up to maximum 10 A. Electrical connection • → 44 • → 51 Endress+Hauser 189 Technical data Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Potential equalization Terminals Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules. Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG). Cable entries • Cable gland: M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in) • Thread for cable entry: • NPT ½" • G ½" • M20 • Device plug for connecting cable: M12 A device plug is always used for the device version with the order code for "Sensor connection housing", option C "Ultra-compact, hygienic, stainless". Cable specification → 36 Overvoltage protection Mains voltage fluctuations → 189 Overvoltage category Overvoltage category II Short-term, temporary overvoltage Between cable and ground up to 1200 V, for max. 5 s Long-term, temporary overvoltage Between cable and ground up to 500 V 16.6 Performance characteristics Reference operating conditions • Error limits following DIN EN 29104, in future ISO 20456 • Water, typically: +15 to +45 °C (+59 to +113 °F); 0.5 to 7 bar (73 to 101 psi) • Data as indicated in the calibration protocol • Accuracy based on accredited calibration rigs according to ISO 17025 • Reference temperature for conductivity measurement: 25 °C (77 °F) Maximum measurement error o.r. = of reading Maximum permissible error under reference operating conditions Volume flow • ±0.5 % o.r. ± 1 mm/s (0.04 in/s) • Optional: ±0.2 % o.r. ± 2 mm/s (0.08 in/s) Fluctuations in the supply voltage do not have any effect within the specified range. 190 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data [%] 2.5 2.0 0.5 % 1.5 0.2 % 1.0 0.5 0 0 1 0 2 5 4 10 6 15 8 20 25 30 10 [m/s] v 32 [ft/s] A0028974 41 Maximum measured error in % o.r. Temperature ±3 °C (±5.4 °F) Electrical conductivity The values apply for: • Devices with stainless steel process connections • Proline 500 – digital device version • Measurements at a reference temperature of 25 °C (77 °F). At different temperatures, attention must be paid to the temperature coefficient of the medium (typically 2.1 %/K) Conductivity [µS/cm] Nominal diameter Measurement error [%] of reading [mm] [in] 5 to 20 15…150 ½…6 ± 20% > 20 to 50 15…150 ½…6 ± 10% 2…8 ¹⁄₁₂ to ⁵⁄₁₆ ± 10% 15…150 ½…6 • Standard: ± 10% • Optional 1): ± 5% > 10 000 to 20 000 2…150 ¹⁄₁₂ to 6 ± 10% > 20 000 to 100 000 2…150 ¹⁄₁₂ to 6 ± 20% > 50 to 10 000 1) Order code for "Calibrated conductivity measurement", option CW [%] +30 +20 +10 0 –10 –20 –30 10⁰ 10¹ 10² 10³ 10⁴ 10⁵ [µS/cm] A0042279 42 Endress+Hauser Measurement error (standard) 191 Technical data Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 [%] +30 +20 +10 0 –10 –20 –30 10⁰ 10¹ 10² 10³ 10⁴ 10⁶ [µS/cm] 10⁵ A0047944 43 Measurement error (optional: order code for "Calibrated conductivity measurement", option CW) Accuracy of outputs The outputs have the following base accuracy specifications. Current output Accuracy ±5 µA Pulse/frequency output o.r. = of reading Accuracy Repeatability Max. ±50 ppm o.r. (over the entire ambient temperature range) o.r. = of reading Volume flow Max. ±0.1 % o.r. ± 0.5 mm/s (0.02 in/s) Temperature ±0.5 °C (±0.9 °F) Electrical conductivity • Max. ±5 % o.r. • Max. ±1 % o.r. for DN 15 to 150 in conjunction with process connections made of stainless steel 1.4404 (F316L) Temperature measurement response time T90 < 15 s Influence of ambient temperature Current output Temperature coefficient Max. 1 μA/°C Pulse/frequency output Temperature coefficient 192 No additional effect. Included in accuracy. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 16.7 Mounting requirements Mounting → 21 16.8 Ambient temperature range Technical data Environment → 26 Temperature tables Observe the interdependencies between the permitted ambient and fluid temperatures when operating the device in hazardous areas. For detailed information on the temperature tables, see the separate document entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device. Storage temperature The storage temperature corresponds to the operating temperature range of the transmitter and the sensor → 26. • Protect the measuring device against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures. • Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as fungus or bacteria infestation can damage the liner. • If protection caps or protective covers are mounted these should never be removed before installing the measuring device. Atmosphere Additional protection against condensation and moisture: the sensor housing is potted with a gel. Order code for "Sensor option", option CF "Harsh environment". Relative humidity The device is suitable for use outdoors and indoors with a relative humidity of 4 to 95 %. Operating height According to EN 61010-1 • ≤ 2 000 m (6 562 ft) • > 2 000 m (6 562 ft) with additional overvoltage protection (e.g. Endress+Hauser HAW Series) Degree of protection Transmitter • IP66/67, Type 4X enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 4 • When the housing is open: IP20, Type 1 enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 2 • Display module: IP20, Type 1 enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 2 Sensor • IP66/67, Type 4X enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 4 • When the housing is open: IP20, Type 1 enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 2 External WLAN antenna IP67 Endress+Hauser 193 Technical data Vibration-resistance and shock-resistance Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Vibration sinusoidal, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 • 2 to 8.4 Hz, 7.5 mm peak • 8.4 to 2 000 Hz, 2 g peak Vibration broad-band random, according to IEC 60068-2-64 • 10 to 200 Hz, 0.01 g2/Hz • 200 to 2 000 Hz, 0.003 g2/Hz • Total: 2.70 g rms Shock half-sine, according to IEC 60068-2-27 6 ms 50 g Rough handling shocks according to IEC 60068-2-31 Internal cleaning • CIP cleaning • SIP cleaning Mechanical load Transmitter housing and sensor connection housing: • Protect against mechanical effects, such as shock or impact • Do not use as a ladder or climbing aid Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) • As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation 21 (NE 21) • As per IEC/EN 61000-6-2 and IEC/EN 61000-6-4 Details are provided in the Declaration of Conformity. This unit is not intended for use in residential environments and cannot guarantee adequate protection of the radio reception in such environments. 16.9 Medium temperature range 194 Process –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data TA [°F] [°C] 140 60 100 40 20 0 0 -20 -40 -40 -40 -20 0 -40 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C] TF 100 200 300 360 [°F] A0027806 44 TA TF Promag 500 – digital Ambient temperature range Fluid temperature TA [°F] [°C] 140 60 100 40 20 0 0 -20 -40 -40 -40 -20 0 -40 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C] TF 100 200 300 360 [°F] A0027450 45 TA TF Promag 500 Ambient temperature range Fluid temperature The permitted fluid temperature in custody transfer is 0 to +50 °C (+32 to +122 °F). Conductivity ≥5 μS/cm for liquids in general. Proline 500 The necessary minimum conductivity also depends on the length of the connecting cable → 27. Endress+Hauser 195 Technical data Pressure-temperature ratings Pressure tightness Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 For an overview of the pressure-temperature ratings for the process connections, see the Technical Information Liner: PFA Nominal diameter Flow limit Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures: [mm] [in] +25 °C (+77 °F) +80 °C (+176 °F) +100 °C (+212 °F) +130 °C (+266 °F) +150 °C (+302 °F) 2 to 150 ¹⁄₁₂ to 6 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) The diameter of the pipe and the flow rate determine the nominal diameter of the sensor. The optimum velocity of flow is between 2 to 3 m/s (6.56 to 9.84 ft/s). Also match the velocity of flow (v) to the physical properties of the medium: • v < 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for low conductivity values • v > 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for media producing buildup (e.g. milk with a high fat content) • A necessary increase in the flow velocity can be achieved by reducing the sensor nominal diameter. • In the case of media with a high solids content, a sensor with a nominal diameter > DN 8 (3/8") can improve the signal stability and cleanability due to the larger electrodes. Pressure loss • No pressure loss occurs as of nominal diameter DN 8 (5/16") if the sensor is installed in a pipe with the same nominal diameter. • Pressure losses for configurations incorporating adapters according to DIN EN 545 → 26 System pressure → 26 Vibrations → 26 16.10 Mechanical construction Design, dimensions Weight For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section All values (weight exclusive of packaging material) refer to devices with flanges of the standard pressure rating. The weight may be lower than indicated depending on the pressure rating and design. Transmitter • Proline 500 – digital polycarbonate: 1.4 kg (3.1 lbs) • Proline 500 – digital aluminum: 2.4 kg (5.3 lbs) • Proline 500 aluminum: 6.5 kg (14.3 lbs) Sensor Sensor with aluminum connection housing version: Nominal diameter 196 Weight [mm] [in] [kg] [lbs] 2 1/12 2.00 4.41 4 5/32 2.00 4.41 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data Nominal diameter Measuring tube specification Materials [mm] [in] [kg] [lbs] 8 5/16 2.00 4.41 15 ½ 1.90 4.19 25 1 2.80 6.17 40 1½ 4.10 9.04 50 2 4.60 10.1 65 – 5.40 11.9 80 3 6.00 13.2 100 4 7.30 16.1 125 5 12.7 28.0 150 6 15.1 33.3 Nominal diameter 1) 2) 3) Weight Pressure rating 1) Process connection internal diameter EN (DIN) PFA [mm] [in] [bar] [mm] [in] 2 1/12 PN 16/40 2.25 0.09 4 5/32 PN 16/40 4.5 0.18 8 5/16 PN 16/40 9.0 0.35 15 ½ PN 16/40 16.0 0.63 2) 0.89 2) – 1 PN 16/40 22.6 25 – PN 16/40 26.0 3) 1.02 3) 40 1½ PN 16/25/40 35.3 1.39 50 2 PN 16/25 48.1 1.89 65 – PN 16/25 59.9 2.36 80 3 PN 16/25 72.6 2.86 100 4 PN 16/25 97.5 3.84 125 5 PN 10/16 120.0 4.72 150 6 PN 10/16 146.5 5.77 Depending on process connection and seals used Order code 5H**22 Order code 5H**26 Transmitter housing Housing of Proline 500 – digital transmitter Order code for "Transmitter housing": • Option A "Aluminum coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated • Option D "Polycarbonate": polycarbonate Housing of Proline 500 transmitter Order code for "Transmitter housing": Option A "Aluminum coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated Endress+Hauser 197 Technical data Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Window material Order code for "Transmitter housing": • Option A "Aluminum, coated": glass • Option D "Polycarbonate": plastic Sensor connection housing Order code for "Sensor connection housing": • Option A "Aluminum coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated • Option B "Stainless, hygienic": Stainless steel 1.4301 (304) • Option C "Ultra-compact hygienic, stainless": Stainless steel 1.4301 (304) Cable entries/cable glands 1 2 3 A0020640 46 1 2 3 Possible cable entries/cable glands Female thread M20 × 1.5 Cable gland M20 × 1.5 Adapter for cable entry with female thread G ½" or NPT ½" Cable entries and adapters Material Cable gland M20 × 1.5 Plastic • Adapter for cable entry with female thread G ½" • Adapter for cable entry with female thread NPT ½" Nickel-plated brass available for certain device versions: •OnlyOrder code for "Transmitter housing": • Option A "Aluminum, coated" • Option D "Polycarbonate" • Order code for "Sensor connection housing": • Proline 500 – digital: Option A "Aluminum coated" Option B "Stainless" • Proline 500: Option A "Aluminum coated" Option C "Stainless, hygienic" Connecting cables UV rays can impair the cable outer sheath. Protect the cable from exposure to sun as much as possible. Connecting cable for sensor - Proline 500 – digital transmitter PVC cable with copper shield Connecting cable for sensor - Proline 500 transmitter PVC cable with copper shield 198 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data Sensor housing Stainless steel 1.4301 (304) Measuring tubes Stainless steel 1.4301 (304) Liner PFA (USP Class VI, FDA 21 CFR 177.2600) Process connections • Stainless steel, 1.4404 (F316L) • PVDF • PVC adhesive sleeve Electrodes Standard: 1.4435 (316L) Seals • O-ring seal, DN 2 to 25 (1/12 to 1"): EPDM, FKM 3), Kalrez • Aseptic 4) gasket seal, DN 2 to 150 (1/12 to 6"): EPDM, FKM 3), VMQ (silicone) Accessories Protective cover Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L) External WLAN antenna • Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylonitrile styrene acrylate) and nickel-plated brass • Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass • Cable: Polyethylene • Plug: Nickel-plated brass • Angle bracket: Stainless steel Grounding rings • Standard: 1.4435 (316L) • Optional: Alloy C22, tantalum Wall mounting kit Stainless steel, 1.4301 (304) 5) Centering star 1.4435 (F316L) Fitted electrodes 3) 4) 5) • 2 measuring electrodes for signal detection • 1 empty pipe detection electrode for empty pipe detection/temperature measurement (only DN 15 to 150 (½ to 6")) USP Class VI, FDA 21 CFR 177.2600, 3A In this context, aseptic means hygienic design Does not meet the hygienic design installation guidelines. Endress+Hauser 199 Technical data Process connections Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 With O-ring seal: • Welding nipple (DIN EN ISO 1127, ODT/SMS, ISO 2037) • Flange (EN (DIN), ASME, JIS) • Flange from PVDF (EN (DIN), ASME, JIS) • Male thread • Female thread • Hose connection • PVC adhesive sleeve With aseptic gasket seal: • Coupling (DIN 11851, DIN 11864-1, ISO 2853, SMS 1145) • Flange DIN 11864-2 For information on the different materials used in the process connections → 199 Surface roughness Electrodes: • Stainless steel, 1.4435 (316L) electropolished ≤ 0.5 µm (19.7 µin) • Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNSN06022); tantalum ≤ 0.5 µm (19.7 µin) (All data refer to parts in contact with the medium) Liner with PFA: ≤ 0.4 µm (15.7 µin) (All data refer to parts in contact with the medium) Stainless steel process connections: • With O-ring seal: ≤ 1.6 µm (63 µin) • With aseptic seal: Ramax = 0.76 µm (31.5 µin) Optional: Ramax = 0.38 µm (15 µin) electropolished (All data refer to parts in contact with the medium) 16.11 Display and user interface Languages Can be operated in the following languages: • Via local operation English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish, Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish • Via web browser English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish, Chinese, Japanese, Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish • Via "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese, Japanese Onsite operation Via display module Features: • Order code for "Display; operation", option F "4-line, illuminated, graphic display; touch control"" • Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated, graphic display; touch control + WLAN" Information about WLAN interface → 88 200 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data 1 2 A0028232 47 1 2 Operation with touch control Proline 500 – digital Proline 500 Display elements • 4-line, illuminated, graphic display • White background lighting; switches to red in event of device errors • Format for displaying measured variables and status variables can be individually configured Operating elements • External operation via touch control (3 optical keys) without opening the housing: , , • Operating elements also accessible in the various zones of the hazardous area Remote operation → 87 Service interface → 87 Supported operating tools Different operating tools can be used for local or remote access to the measuring device. Depending on the operating tool used, access is possible with different operating units and via a variety of interfaces. Endress+Hauser Supported operating tools Operating unit Interface Additional information Web browser Notebook, PC or tablet with web browser • CDI-RJ45 service interface • WLAN interface Special Documentation for device DeviceCare SFE100 Notebook, PC or tablet • CDI-RJ45 service with Microsoft Windows interface system • WLAN interface • Fieldbus protocol → 179 FieldCare SFE500 Notebook, PC or tablet • CDI-RJ45 service with Microsoft Windows interface system • WLAN interface • Fieldbus protocol → 179 201 Technical data Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Supported operating tools Operating unit Interface Additional information Field Xpert SMT70/77/50 • All Fieldbus protocols • WLAN interface • Bluetooth • CDI-RJ45 service interface Operating Instructions BA01202S WLAN → 179 SmartBlue app Smart phone or tablet with iOs or Android Device description files: Use update function of handheld terminal Other operating tools based on FDT technology with a device driver such as DTM/ iDTM or DD/EDD can be used for device operation. These operating tools are available from the individual manufacturers. Integration into the following operating tools, among others, is supported: • Field Device Manager (FDM) from Honeywell → www.process.honeywell.com • FieldMate from Yokogawa → www.yokogawa.com • PACTWare → www.pactware.com The related device description files are available: www.endress.com → Download Area Web server With the integrated web server, the device can be operated and configured via a web browser service interface (CDI-RJ45) or WLAN interface. The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values, status information on the device is displayed and can be used to monitor device health. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters can be configured. A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication by computer or a mobile handheld terminal. Supported functions Data exchange between the operating unit (such as a notebook, for example,) and measuring device: • Upload the configuration from the measuring device (XML format, configuration backup) • Save the configuration to the measuring device (XML format, restore configuration) • Export event list (.csv file) • Export parameter settings (.csv file or PDF file, document the measuring point configuration) • Export the Heartbeat verification report (PDF file, only available with the Heartbeat Verification → 206 application package) • Flash firmware version for device firmware upgrade, for example • Download driver for system integration • Visualize up to 1000 saved measured values (only available with the Extended HistoROM application package→ 206) HistoROM data management The measuring device features HistoROM data management. HistoROM data management comprises both the storage and import/export of key device and process data, making operation and servicing far more reliable, secure and efficient. When the device is delivered, the factory settings of the configuration data are stored as a backup in the device memory. This memory can be overwritten with an updated data record, for example after commissioning. 202 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data Additional information on the data storage concept There are different types of data storage units in which device data are stored and used by the device: Available data HistoROM backup T-DAT S-DAT • Event logbook, e.g. diagnostic events • Parameter data record backup • Device firmware package • Measured value logging ("Extended HistoROM" order option) • Current parameter data record (used by firmware at run time) • Indicator (minimum/maximum values) • Totalizer value • Sensor data: e.g. nominal diameter • Serial number • Calibration data • Device configuration (e.g. SW options, fixed I/O or multi I/O) Can be plugged into the user interface PC board in the connection compartment In the sensor plug in the transmitter neck part Storage location Fixed on the user interface PC board in the connection compartment Data backup Automatic • The most important device data (sensor and transmitter) are automatically saved in the DAT modules • If the transmitter or measuring device is replaced: once the T-DAT containing the previous device data has been exchanged, the new measuring device is ready for operation again immediately without any errors • If the sensor is replaced: once the sensor has been replaced, new sensor data are transferred from the S-DAT in the measuring device and the measuring device is ready for operation again immediately without any errors • If exchanging the electronics module (e.g. I/O electronics module): Once the electronics module has been replaced, the software of the module is compared against the current device firmware. The module software is upgraded or downgraded where necessary. The electronics module is available for use immediately afterwards and no compatibility problems occur. Manual Additional parameter data record (complete parameter settings) in the integrated device memory HistoROM backup for: • Data backup function Backup and subsequent restoration of a device configuration in the device memory HistoROM backup • Data comparison function Comparison of the current device configuration with the device configuration saved in the device memory HistoROM backup Data transmission Manual Transfer of a device configuration to another device using the export function of the specific operating tool, e.g. with FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server: to duplicate the configuration or to store in an archive (e.g. for backup purposes) Event list Automatic • Chronological display of up to 20 event messages in the events list • If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: up to 100 event messages are displayed in the events list along with a time stamp, plain text description and remedial measures • The events list can be exported and displayed via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g. DeviceCare, FieldCare or Web server Endress+Hauser 203 Technical data Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Data logging Manual If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: • Recording of 1 to 4 channels of up to 1 000 measured values (up to 250 measured values per channel) • User configurable recording interval • Export the measured value log via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare or web server 16.12 Certificates and approvals Current certificates and approvals for the product are available at www.endress.com on the relevant product page: CE mark 1. Select the product using the filters and search field. 2. Open the product page. 3. Select Downloads. The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable EU Directives. These are listed in the corresponding EU Declaration of Conformity along with the standards applied. Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark. UKCA marking The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable UK regulations (Statutory Instruments). These are listed in the UKCA Declaration of Conformity along with the designated standards. By selecting the order option for UKCA marking, Endress+Hauser confirms a successful evaluation and testing of the device by affixing the UKCA mark. Contact address Endress+Hauser UK: Endress+Hauser Ltd. Floats Road Manchester M23 9NF United Kingdom www.uk.endress.com RCM marking The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the "Australian Communications and Media Authority (ACMA)". Ex-approval The devices are certified for use in hazardous areas and the relevant safety instructions are provided in the separate "Safety Instructions" (XA) document. Reference is made to this document on the nameplate. 204 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data Sanitary compatibility • 3-A SSI 28-06 or more recent • Confirmation by affixing the 3-A logo for measuring devices with the order code for "Additional approval", option LP "3-A". • The 3-A approval refers to the measuring device. • When installing the measuring device, ensure that no liquid can accumulate on the outside of the measuring device. Remote transmitters must be installed in accordance with the 3-A Standard. • Accessories (e.g. weather protection cover, wall holder unit) must be installed in accordance with the 3-A Standard. Each accessory can be cleaned. Disassembly may be necessary under certain circumstances. • EHEDG Type EL Class I • Confirmation by affixing the EHEDG symbol for measuring devices with the order code for "Additional approval", option LT "EHEDG". • EPDM is not a suitable seal material for fluids with a fat content > 8 %. • To meet the requirements for EHEDG certification, the device must be used with process connections in accordance with the EHEDG position paper entitled "Easy Cleanable Pipe Couplings and Process Connections" (www.ehedg.org). • FDA 21 CFR 177 • Food Contact Materials Regulation (EC) 1935/2004 • Food Contact Materials Regulation China GB 4806 • Pasteurized Milk Ordinance (PMO) Pharmaceutical compatibility • FDA 21 CFR 177 • USP <87> • USP <88> Class VI 121 °C • TSE/BSE Certificate of Suitability • cGMP Devices with the order code for "Test, certificate", option JG "Conformity with cGMPderived requirements, declaration" comply with the requirements of cGMP with regard to the surfaces of parts in contact with the medium, design, FDA 21 CFR material conformity, USP Class VI tests and TSE/BSE conformity. A serial number-specific declaration is generated. Radio approval The measuring device has radio approval. For detailed information on the radio approval, see the Special Documentation Pressure Equipment Directive • With the marking a) PED/G1/x (x = category) or b) PESR/G1/x (x = category) on the sensor nameplate, Endress+Hauser confirms compliance with the "Essential Safety Requirements" a) specified in Annex I of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU or b) Schedule 2 of Statutory Instruments 2016 No. 1105. • Devices not bearing this marking (without PED or PESR) are designed and manufactured according to sound engineering practice. They meet the requirements of a) Art. 4 Para. 3 of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU or b) Part 1, Para. 8 of Statutory Instruments 2016 No. 1105. The scope of application is indicated a) in diagrams 6 to 9 in Annex II of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU or b) Schedule 3, Para. 2 of Statutory Instruments 2016 No. 1105. Additional certification PWIS-free PWIS = paint-wetting impairment substances Endress+Hauser 205 Technical data Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Order code for "Service": • Option HC: PWIS-free (version A) • Option HD: PWIS-free (version B) • Option HE: PWIS-free (version C) For more information on PWIS-free certification, see "Test specification" document TS01028D External standards and guidelines • EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) • EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use - general requirements • EN 61326-1/-2-3 EMC requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use • NAMUR NE 21 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control equipment • NAMUR NE 32 Data retention in the event of a power failure in field and control instruments with microprocessors • NAMUR NE 43 Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitters with analog output signal. • NAMUR NE 53 Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics • NAMUR NE 105 Specifications for integrating fieldbus devices in engineering tools for field devices • NAMUR NE 107 Self-monitoring and diagnosis of field devices • NAMUR NE 131 Requirements for field devices for standard applications • ETSI EN 300 328 Guidelines for 2.4 GHz radio components. • EN 301489 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM). 16.13 Application packages Many different application packages are available to enhance the functionality of the device. Such packages might be needed to address safety aspects or specific application requirements. The application packages can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress+Hauser. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com. Diagnostic functionality Order code for "Application package", option EA "Extended HistoROM" Comprises extended functions concerning the event log and the activation of the measured value memory. Event log: Memory volume is extended from 20 message entries (standard version) to up to 100 entries. 206 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data Data logging (line recorder): • Memory capacity for up to 1000 measured values is activated. • 250 measured values can be output via each of the 4 memory channels. The recording interval can be defined and configured by the user. • Measured value logs can be accessed via the local display or operating tool e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server. For detailed information, see the Operating Instructions for the device. Heartbeat Technology Order code for "Application package", option EB "Heartbeat Verification + Monitoring" Heartbeat Verification Meets the requirement for traceable verification to DIN ISO 9001:2008 Chapter 7.6 a) "Control of monitoring and measuring equipment". • Functional testing in the installed state without interrupting the process. • Traceable verification results on request, including a report. • Simple testing process via local operation or other operating interfaces. • Clear measuring point assessment (pass/fail) with high test coverage within the framework of manufacturer specifications. • Extension of calibration intervals according to operator's risk assessment. Heartbeat Monitoring Continuously supplies data, which are characteristic of the measuring principle, to an external condition monitoring system for the purpose of preventive maintenance or process analysis. These data enable the operator to: • Draw conclusions - using these data and other information - about the impact process influences (e.g. buildup, interference from the magnetic field) have on the measuring performance over time. • Schedule servicing in time. • Monitor the process or product quality . For detailed information, see the Special Documentation for the device. Cleaning Order code for "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning " The electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) function has been developed to have a solution for applications where magnetite (Fe3O4) deposits frequently occur (e.g. hot water). Since magnetite is highly conductive this build up leads to measuring errors and ultimately to the loss of signal. The application package is designed to avoid build-up of very conductive matter and thin layers (typical of magnetite). For detailed information, see the Operating Instructions for the device. 16.14 Accessories Overview of accessories available to order → 177 16.15 Supplementary documentation For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the following: • Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number from the nameplate • Endress+Hauser Operations app: Enter serial number from nameplate or scan matrix code on nameplate. Endress+Hauser 207 Technical data Standard documentation Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Brief Operating Instructions Brief Operating Instructions for the sensor Measuring device Documentation code Proline Promag H KA01289D Brief Operating Instructions for the transmitter Measuring device Documentation code Proline 500 – digital KA01317D Proline 500 KA01316D Technical Information Measuring device Documentation code Promag H 500 TI01225D Description of Device Parameters Measuring device Documentation code Promag 500 GP01055D Supplementary devicedependent documentation Safety instructions Safety instructions for electrical equipment for hazardous areas. Contents Documentation code ATEX/IECEx Ex i XA01522D ATEX/IECEx Ex ec XA01523D cCSAus IS XA01524D cCSAus Ex e ia/Ex d ia XA01525D cCSAus Ex nA XA01526D INMETRO Ex i XA01527D INMETRO Ex ec XA01528D NEPSI Ex i XA01529D NEPSI Ex nA XA01530D EAC Ex i XA01658D EAC Ex nA XA01659D JPN XA01776D Special Documentation Contents Documentation code Information on the Pressure Equipment Directive SD01614D Radio approvals for WLAN interface for A309/A310 display module SD01793D Web server SD01659D 208 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Technical data Contents Documentation code Heartbeat Technology SD01746D Web server SD01659D Installation instructions Endress+Hauser Contents Note Installation instructions for spare part sets and accessories • Access the overview of all the available spare part sets via Device Viewer → 175 • Accessories available for order with Installation Instructions → 177 209 Index Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Index A Access authorization to parameters Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Incorrect input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Additional certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Operating height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Relative humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Vibration-resistance and shock-resistance . . . . . . 194 Ambient temperature Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 193 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Applicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Attaching the connecting cable Proline 500 transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Auto scan buffer see Modbus RS485 Modbus data map C Cable entries Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Cable entry Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 204 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 cGMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Check Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Mounting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Checklist Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Post-mounting check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 CIP cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Cleaning Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Configuring the measuring instrument . . . . . . . . . 99 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Configuring error response mode, Modbus RS485 . . 161 Connecting the connecting cable Proline 500 – digital transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Proline 500 terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Sensor connection housing, Proline 500 . . . . . . . . 51 Sensor connection housing, Proline 500 - digital . . 44 Terminal assignment of Proline 500 - digital . . . . . 44 210 Connecting the measuring instrument Proline 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Proline 500 – digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Connecting the signal cable/supply voltage cable Proline 500 – digital transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Proline 500 transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Connection see Electrical connection Connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Connection examples, potential equalization . . . . . . . 56 Connection preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Connection tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Context menu Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 D Date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 18 Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Defining the access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 140 Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 193 Design Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Device history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Device locking, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Device name Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Device repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Device revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Device type code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Diagnosis Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Diagnostic behavior Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Diagnostic information Communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Design, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 160 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Light emitting diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Remedial measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Diagnostics list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Index DIP switch see Write protection switch Direct access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Disabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Display see Local display Display area For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Display values For locking status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Document Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Firmware Release date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Fitted electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Functions see Parameters E Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Using operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74 Electrical connection Computer with web browser (e.g. Microsoft Edge) 87 Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Measuring instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Operating tools Via Modbus RS485 protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Via WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Enabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Enabling/disabling the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Endress+Hauser services Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Environment Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Error messages see Diagnostic messages Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Events list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Ex-approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Extended order code Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 F FDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Field of application Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Endress+Hauser G H Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Help text Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 HistoROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 I Identifying the measuring instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Indication Current diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Previous diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Influence Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Information about this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Inlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Inspection Received goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Installation conditions Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Internal cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 L Languages, operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Length of connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 see Diagnostic message see In alarm condition see Operational display Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 211 Index M Main electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Maintenance tasks Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Maximum measurement error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Measured values Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 see Process variables Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Measuring device Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Cleaning with pigs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Mounting grounding rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Mounting the seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Welding nipple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Preparing for electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Measuring instrument Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Integrating via communication protocol . . . . . . . . 92 Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Measuring tube specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Medium temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Menu Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 100 Menus For measuring instrument configuration . . . . . . . . 99 For specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Modbus RS485 Configuring error response mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Diagnostic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Modbus data map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Reading out data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Register addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Register information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Scan list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Mounting dimensions see Installation dimensions Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 212 Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Mounting preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Mounting requirements Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Inlet and outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Length of connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Mounting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 N Nameplate Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Navigation path (navigation view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Navigation view In the submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 In the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Netilion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 O Onsite display Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 157 Operating height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Operating keys see Operating elements Operating menu Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Menus, submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Submenus and user roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Order code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 18 Orientation (vertical, horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Output variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 P Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Parameter Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Entering values or text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Parameter settings Administration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Advanced setup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Communication (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Configuration backup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Configure flow damping (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Current input (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Current input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Current output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Define access code (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Device information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Diagnostics (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Display (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Display (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Double pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Double pulse output (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Double pulse output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Electrode cleaning cycle (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . 131 Empty pipe detection (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 I/O configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Low flow cut off (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Process variables (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Pulse/frequency/switch output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 110, 113 Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n (Submenu) 147 Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Relay output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Relay output 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Reset access code (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Sensor adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Setup (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Simulation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Status input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Status input 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 System units (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Totalizer (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Totalizer 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Totalizer handling (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Value current output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . 147 Web server (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 WLAN settings (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Pharmaceutical compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Post-connection check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Post-mounting check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Post-mounting check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Pressure Equipment Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Pressure-temperature ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Process conditions Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Fluid temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Endress+Hauser Index Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Proline 500 – digital transmitter Connecting the signal cable/supply voltage cable . . 49 Proline 500 connecting cable terminal assignment Sensor connection housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Proline 500 transmitter Connecting the signal cable/supply voltage cable . . 54 Protecting parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 R Radio approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 RCM marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Reading off measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Reading out diagnostic information, Modbus RS485 161 Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Remedial measures Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Repair of a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Replacement Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Requirements for personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 S Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Sanitary compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Sensor Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 18 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Settings Adapting the measuring device to the process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Advanced display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Double pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Empty pipe detection (EPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . 109, 110 Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Resetting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 213 Index Resetting the totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 SIP cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Spare part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Special mounting instructions Hygienic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Status area For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Status signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 159 Storage concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Submenu Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 136 Advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 126 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Configuration backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Current input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Double pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Electrode cleaning cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Events list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . 147 Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Reset access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Totalizer 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Totalizer handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Value current output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 214 Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Symbols Controlling data entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 For communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 For diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 For locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 For measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 For measurement channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 For menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 For parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 For status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 For submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 For wizards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 In the status area of the local display . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 System design Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 see Measuring device design System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 T Technical data, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Temperature measurement response time . . . . . . . . 192 Temperature range Ambient temperature range for display . . . . . . . . 200 Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Terminal assignment of connecting cable for Proline 500- digital Sensor connection housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Tool For electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 For mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Tool tip see Help text Totalizer Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Transmitter Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Turning the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Transporting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Troubleshooting General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 TSE/BSE Certificate of Suitability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Turning the electronics housing see Turning the transmitter housing Turning the transmitter housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 U UKCA marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Use of measuring device Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Endress+Hauser Proline Promag H 500 Modbus RS485 Index Use of measuring instrument see Intended use User roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 USP Class VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 V Version data for the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Vibration-resistance and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . 194 Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 W W@M Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Weight Transport (notes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Wizard Configure flow damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Double pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Empty pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . 109, 110, 113 Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Write protection Via access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Endress+Hauser 215 *71661666* 71661666 www.addresses.endress.com ">

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement